M-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 0530 13 Part no. 1665844501 Edition A 2015

É1665844501LËÍ1665844501

M-Cla

ssOp

erator

'sMa

nual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMAND dis-play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 09.09.2013

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1665844501 É1665844501LËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 24

At a glance ........................................... 33

Safety ................................................... 43

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 103

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119

Climate control ................................. 137

Driving and parking .......................... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 265

Stowage and features ...................... 333

Maintenance and care ...................... 365

Breakdown assistance ..................... 381

Wheels and tires ............................... 399

Technical data ................................... 445

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 35012 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 376Function/notes ............................. 229

4ETSsee ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 249

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 285Function/notes ................................ 68Important safety notes .................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 321

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 60

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 144Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 276Display message ............................ 308Function/information .................... 241Trailer towing ................................. 244

Active Curve SystemDisplay message ............................ 305Function/notes ............................. 212

Active Driving Assistance package .. 241Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 276Display message ............................ 307Function/information .................... 244Trailer towing ................................. 247

Active light function ......................... 125Active Parking Assist

Display message ............................ 308Exiting a parking space .................. 223Function/notes ............................. 220Important safety notes .................. 220

Parking .......................................... 222Towing a trailer .............................. 224

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 292Function/notes ................................ 71

Adaptive damping systemsee ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 300Function/notes ............................. 126Switching on/off ........................... 126

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 453ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

Function/notes ............................. 212Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 58Display message ............................ 295Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 51Important safety notes .................... 50Introduction ..................................... 50Knee bag .......................................... 52PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 45Side impact air bag .......................... 52Window curtain air bag .................... 52

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 303AIR FLOW ........................................... 147AIRMATIC package

ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 212Function/notes ............................. 211Level control .................................. 213

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 153Important safety notes .................. 152Rear ............................................... 153Setting ........................................... 152Setting the center air vents ........... 152Setting the side air vents ............... 153

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 77Switching off (ATA) .......................... 77Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 77

4 Index

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 278Setting the color (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 278

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ................................................ 215AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 281Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Approach/departure angle .............. 194Ashtray ............................................... 348Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 275Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 275ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 371Hiding a service message .............. 371Notes ............................................. 370Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 371Service message ............................ 370Special service requirements ......... 371

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 77Function ........................................... 77Switching off the alarm .................... 77

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 276Display message ............................ 304Function/notes ............................. 233

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 272Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 300see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 372

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 163Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 162Automatic headlamp mode .............. 120Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 171Automatic drive program ............... 173Changing gear ............................... 171DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 168Display message ............................ 315Drive program display .................... 168Driving tips .................................... 171Emergency running mode .............. 177Engaging drive position .................. 170Engaging neutral ............................ 169Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 169Engaging reverse gear ................... 169Engaging the park position ............ 168Kickdown ....................................... 171Manual drive program .................... 173Manual drive program (AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 174Manual drive program (vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD package) .. 174Overview ........................................ 168Problem (malfunction) ................... 177Program selector button ................ 172Pulling away ................................... 160Starting the engine ........................ 160Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 172Trailer towing ................................. 171Transmission position display ........ 168Transmission positions .................. 170

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 177Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 460

BBag hook ............................................ 339Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 258Removing ....................................... 262Storing ........................................... 262

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68

Index 5

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 69Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 83Important safety notes .................... 83Replacing ......................................... 83

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 389Display message ............................ 301Important safety notes .................. 387Jump starting ................................. 391Overview ........................................ 387

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 276Display message ............................ 308Notes/function .............................. 237Trailer towing ................................. 239see Active Blind Spot Assist

BlueTECAdding DEF .................................... 180

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 451Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 291Notes ............................................. 453

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 132Display message ............................ 298

BrakesABS .................................................. 68Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 71BAS .................................................. 68BAS PLUS ........................................ 69Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 453Display message ............................ 285High-performance brake system .... 189Important safety notes .................. 188Maintenance .................................. 189Parking brake ................................ 184Riding tips ...................................... 188Warning lamp ................................. 320

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 35Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 376Carpets .......................................... 379Car wash ........................................ 372Display ........................................... 377Exhaust pipe .................................. 376Exterior lights ................................ 375Gear or selector lever .................... 378Interior ........................................... 377Matte finish ................................... 374Night View Assist Plus ................... 377Notes ............................................. 371Paint .............................................. 373Plastic trim .................................... 378Power washer ................................ 373Rear view camera .......................... 376Roof lining ...................................... 379Seat belt ........................................ 379Seat cover ..................................... 378Sensors ......................................... 375Steering wheel ............................... 378Trim pieces .................................... 378Washing by hand ........................... 373Wheels ........................................... 374Windows ........................................ 375Wiper blades .................................. 375Wooden trim .................................. 378

Cargo compartment coverNotes/how to use ......................... 340

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 337

Cargo compartment floorOpening/closing ............................ 344Stowage well (under) ..................... 344

6 Index

Cargo netAttaching ....................................... 342Important safety information ......... 342

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 339Car key

see SmartKeyCD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 273Center console

Lower section .................................. 39Upper section .................................. 38

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 279Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 80

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 132High-beam headlamps ................... 131Low-beam headlamps .................... 130Parking lamps ................................ 131Side marker lamps ......................... 131Standing lamps (front) ................... 131

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 66Rear doors ....................................... 66

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 61Restraint systems ............................ 62Special seat belt retractor ............... 61

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 65LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 63On the front-passenger seat ............ 65Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65Top Tether ....................................... 64

Cigarette lighter ................................ 348Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 375Trailer tow hitch ............................. 376

Climate controlAutomatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 142Controlling automatically ............... 146Cooling with air dehumidification .. 144Defrosting the windows ................. 150Defrosting the windshield .............. 149

Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 139General notes ................................ 138Indicator lamp ................................ 146Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 144Maximum cooling .......................... 149Overview of systems ...................... 138Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 146Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 151Rear control panel ......................... 142Refrigerant ..................................... 455Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 455Setting the air distribution ............. 148Setting the airflow ......................... 148Setting the air vents ...................... 152Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 147Setting the temperature ................ 147Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 151Switching on/off ........................... 144Switching residual heat on/off ...... 151Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 150Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 149

Climate control systemAutomatic engine start .................. 163Automatic engine switch-off .......... 162Deactivating/activating ................. 163General information ....................... 162Important safety notes .................. 162Introduction ................................... 162

Coat hooks ......................................... 342Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 34see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTOperation/notes .............................. 70

COMANDON&OFFROAD menu ..................... 255see separate operating instructions

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 377

Index 7

Combination switch .......................... 123Combined cargo cover and net ........ 341Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 269Convenience closing feature .............. 95Convenience opening feature ............ 95Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 369Display message ............................ 300Filling capacity ............................... 454Important safety notes .................. 453Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 281Temperature gauge ........................ 266Warning lamp ................................. 328

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 31Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 297Function/notes ............................. 125

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 129Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 196Activation conditions ..................... 196Cruise control lever ....................... 196Deactivating ................................... 197Display message ............................ 311Driving system ............................... 195Function/notes ............................. 195Important safety notes .................. 196Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 196

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 346Important safety notes .................. 345Rear compartment ......................... 346Temperature controlled ................. 346

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 29Customer Relations Department ....... 29

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 299Function/notes ............................. 120Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 277

Declarations of conformity ................. 28DEF

Adding ........................................... 180Display message ............................ 303Filling capacity ............................... 452Important safety notes .................. 451

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 278Interior lighting .............................. 279

Diagnostics connection ...................... 28Diesel .................................................. 449Differential lock (display mes-sage) ................................................... 306Digital speedometer ......................... 270DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 168Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 370Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 284Driving systems ............................. 304Engine ............................................ 300General notes ................................ 284Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 284KEYLESS-GO .................................. 317Lights ............................................. 297Safety systems .............................. 285SmartKey ....................................... 317Tires ............................................... 312Vehicle ........................................... 315

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 330

8 Index

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 275Function/notes ................................ 70Warning lamp ................................. 330

DISTRONIC PLUSActivating ....................................... 200Activation conditions ..................... 200Cruise control lever ....................... 200Deactivating ................................... 204Display message ............................ 309Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 205Driving tips .................................... 205Function/notes ............................. 198Important safety notes .................. 199Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 203Warning lamp ................................. 330

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 279Automatic locking (switch) ............... 88Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 80Control panel ................................... 42Display message ............................ 316Emergency locking ........................... 88Emergency unlocking ....................... 88Important safety notes .................... 86Opening (from inside) ...................... 87Overview .......................................... 86Power closing feature ...................... 88

Downhill speed regulationsee DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Drinking and driving ......................... 186Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 173Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 168Manual ........................................... 173Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 174Manual (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) ................ 174Off-road program (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 251SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 281see On-road programs

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 371Symmetrical low beam .................. 120

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 194

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 71BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 69COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 70Distance warning function ............... 70EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 75ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 72ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 72Important safety information ........... 67Overview .......................................... 67PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 75STEER CONTROL ............................. 77

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 229Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 241Active Curve System ...................... 212Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 241Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 244Active Parking Assist ..................... 220ADS ............................................... 212AIRMATIC package ........................ 211AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 215ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 233Blind Spot Assist ............................ 237Cruise control ................................ 195Display message ............................ 304DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 198

Index 9

HOLD function ............................... 210Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 239Level control (vehicles with AIR-MATIC package) ............................. 213Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) ................ 206On-road programs .......................... 247PARKTRONIC ................................. 217Rear view camera .......................... 224

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 171Brakes ........................................... 188Break-in period .............................. 156DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 205Downhill gradient ........................... 188Drinking and driving ....................... 186Driving abroad ............................... 120Driving in winter ............................. 190Driving on flooded roads ................ 190Driving on sand .............................. 193Driving on wet roads ...................... 190Driving over obstacles ................... 194Exhaust check ............................... 186Fuel ................................................ 186General .......................................... 186Hydroplaning ................................. 190Icy road surfaces ........................... 190Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 188Off-road driving .............................. 192Off-road fording ............................. 190Snow chains .................................. 403Symmetrical low beam .................. 120Tire ruts ......................................... 194Towing a trailer .............................. 257Traveling uphill ............................... 194Wet road surface ........................... 188

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)Display message ............................ 306Function/notes ............................. 250

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 273

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 279Function/notes ............................. 113

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 114Function/notes ............................. 113Switching on/off ........................... 279

EASY-PACK load-securing kitComponents and storage .............. 342

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 287Function/notes ................................ 75

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 187On-board computer ....................... 270

ECO start/stop function (ML 250BlueTEC 4MATIC)

Automatic engine start .................. 165Automatic engine switch-off .......... 165General notes ................................ 164Important safety notes .................. 164Introduction ................................... 164Switching on/off ........................... 165

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 60

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 88Vehicle ............................................. 88

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 441Important safety notes .................. 440Removing ....................................... 441Storage location ............................ 441Technical data ............................... 443

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 58

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 93

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 25

10 Index

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 327Display message ............................ 300ECO start/stop function ................ 162Engine number ............................... 447Irregular running ............................ 167Jump-starting ................................. 391Starting problems .......................... 167Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 160Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 160Switching off .................................. 183Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 396

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 167

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 368Additives ........................................ 453Checking the oil level ..................... 367Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 367Display message ............................ 302Filling capacity ............................... 452Notes about oil grades ................... 452Notes on oil level/consumption .... 367Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 281Viscosity ........................................ 453

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 281Characteristics ................................. 73Deactivating/activating ................... 73Display message ............................ 285ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72Function/notes ................................ 72General notes .................................. 72Important safety information ........... 73Trailer stabilization ........................... 74Warning lamp ................................. 323

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 72Exhaust check ................................... 186Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 376

Exterior lightingsee Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 114Dipping (automatic) ....................... 115Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 115Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 115Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 280Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 115Setting ........................................... 115Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116Storing the parking position .......... 116

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 336

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 383Preparing the vehicle ..................... 383TIREFIT kit ...................................... 384see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 364Folding the rear bench seat for-wards/back ....................................... 337Fording

Off-road ......................................... 190On flooded roads ........................... 190

FuelAdditives ........................................ 449Consumption statistics .................. 269Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 270Displaying the range ...................... 270Driving tips .................................... 186Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 450Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Grade (gasoline) ............................ 448Important safety notes .................. 448Low outside temperatures ............. 450Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 448Problem (malfunction) ................... 180Quality (diesel) ............................... 449

Index 11

Refueling ........................................ 177Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 448

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 179

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 303Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 270

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 448Problem (malfunction) ................... 180

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 396Before changing ............................. 396Dashboard fuse box ....................... 397Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 397Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 398Important safety notes .................. 396

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 363General notes ................................ 360Important safety notes .................. 361Opening/closing the garage door .. 363Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 361

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 281Genuine parts ...................................... 24Glove box ........................................... 335GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 421

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 124Headlamps

Cleaning system (function) ............ 125Fogging up ..................................... 127see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 106Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107Adjusting (rear) .............................. 108Installing/removing (rear) .............. 108Luxury ............................................ 107

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsAdaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 126Changing bulbs .............................. 131Display message ............................ 298Switching on/off ........................... 124

Hill start assist .................................. 161HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 211Display message ............................ 307Function/notes ............................. 210

HoodClosing ........................................... 367Display message ............................ 316Important safety notes .................. 366Opening ......................................... 366

Horn ...................................................... 34Hydroplaning ..................................... 190

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 77Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInsect protection on the radiator .... 367Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 35Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 266Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 128Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 279Emergency lighting ........................ 129Manual control ............................... 128Overview ........................................ 127Reading lamp ................................. 127

12 Index

Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 278Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 278

JJack

Storage location ............................ 382Using ............................................. 425

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 391

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 96Display message ............................ 317Locking ............................................ 81Removing the Start/Stop button ... 159Start/Stop button .......................... 158Starting the engine ........................ 160Unlocking ......................................... 81

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 158SmartKey ....................................... 157

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 171Manual drive program .................... 175

Knee bag .............................................. 52

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 276Display message ............................ 307Function/information .................... 239see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 282LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 63Level control (display message) ...... 304

Level control (vehicles with AIR-MATIC package)

Basic settings ................................ 214Function/notes ............................. 213Important safety notes .................. 213

Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

Basic settings ................................ 207Function/notes ............................. 206Important safety notes .................. 206

License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 298Light function, active

Display message ............................ 299Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 279Active light function ....................... 125Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 126Automatic headlamp mode ............ 120Cornering light function ................. 125Driving abroad ............................... 120Hazard warning lamps ................... 124High beam flasher .......................... 124High-beam headlamps ................... 124Light switch ................................... 120Low-beam headlamps .................... 121Parking lamps ................................ 122Rear fog lamp ................................ 122Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 278Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 278Standing lamps .............................. 123Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 277Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 278Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 278Turn signals ................................... 123see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 300

Index 13

Loading guidelines ............................ 334Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 88Emergency locking ........................... 88From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 87

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 279Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 130Display message ............................ 297Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 120Switching on/off ........................... 121

LOW RANGEDisplay message ............................ 306Off-road gear ................................. 253

LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 253Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 343Lumbar support

Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 108Luxury head restraints ..................... 107

MM+S tires ............................................ 402Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 374mbrace

Call priority .................................... 356Display message ............................ 291Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 356Downloading routes ....................... 359Emergency call .............................. 353General notes ................................ 352Geo fencing ................................... 360Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 358MB info call button ........................ 355Remote vehicle locking .................. 358

Roadside Assistance button .......... 354Search & Send ............................... 357Self-test ......................................... 353Speed alert .................................... 360System .......................................... 353Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 360Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 359Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 358

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 82Inserting .......................................... 83Locking vehicle ................................ 88Removing ......................................... 82Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 273Memory function ............................... 116Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 284Mirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 273

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 81MOExtended tires .............................. 383Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 428Mounting a new wheel ................... 427Preparing the vehicle ..................... 424Raising the vehicle ......................... 425Removing a wheel .......................... 427Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 424

MP3Operation ....................................... 273see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 268Permanent display ......................... 277

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 267Overview .......................................... 37

14 Index

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 271see separate operating instructions

Night View Assist PlusActivating/deactivating ................. 235Cleaning ......................................... 377Problem (malfunction) ................... 237

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 156

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 57Operation ......................................... 53System self-test ............................... 55

Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 60Children in the vehicle ..................... 61Important safety notes .................... 45Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 60

OCSConditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 57Operation ......................................... 53System self-test ............................... 55

Odometer ........................................... 269Off-road driving

Approach/departure angle ............ 458Checklist after driving off-road ...... 193Checklist before driving off-road .... 192Fording depth ................................ 457General information ....................... 192Important safety notes .................. 191Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 458Traveling uphill ............................... 194

Off-road programs (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package)

Displays in the COMAND display ... 255Function/notes ............................. 251

Off-road program 1 ........................ 252Off-road program 2 ........................ 252

Off-road system4MATIC .......................................... 249DSR ............................................... 250LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 253Off-road 4ETS .................................. 73Off-road ABS .................................... 68Off-road ESP® .................................. 74Off-road programs (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package) .......... 251

Oilsee Engine oil

On and Offroad menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 281On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 281Assistance menu ........................... 275Audio menu ................................... 272Convenience submenu .................. 279Displaying a service message ........ 371Display messages .......................... 284DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 205Factory settings submenu ............. 281Important safety notes .................. 266Instrument cluster submenu .......... 277Lighting submenu .......................... 277Menu overview .............................. 269Message memory .......................... 284Navigation menu ............................ 271On and Offroad menu .................... 281Operation ....................................... 267RACETIMER ................................... 282Service menu ................................. 276Settings menu ............................... 277Standard display ............................ 269Telephone menu ............................ 273Trip menu ...................................... 269Vehicle submenu ........................... 279Video DVD operation ..................... 273

On-road programsAUTO program ............................... 247Function/notes ............................. 247Snow program ............................... 248SPORT program ............................. 248Trailer program .............................. 249

Index 15

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 132Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Important safety notes .................... 27

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 25

Outside temperature display ........... 267Overhead control panel ...................... 41Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 67

PPaint code number ............................ 446Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 373Panic alarm .......................................... 44Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 97Opening/closing .............................. 99Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ............................................... 100Problem (malfunction) ................... 101Resetting ....................................... 100

ParkingImportant safety notes .................. 182Parking brake ................................ 184Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 116Rear view camera .......................... 224see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 220see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 288Electric parking brake .................... 184Warning lamp ................................. 326

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 122

Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 219Driving system ............................... 217Function/notes ............................. 217Important safety notes .................. 217Problem (malfunction) ................... 220Range of the sensors ..................... 217Trailer towing ................................. 219Warning display ............................. 218

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 45Problems (malfunction) .................. 295

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 378Power closing feature ......................... 88Power washers .................................. 373Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 291Operation ......................................... 60

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 276Display message ............................ 293Function/notes ................................ 75Warning lamp ................................. 330

Program selector button .................. 172Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 24Pulling away

Trailer ............................................ 161Pulling away (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 160

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 29

RRACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 282Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 279Display message ............................ 307

Radiator cover ................................... 367

16 Index

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 272see separate operating instructions

Radio-controlled devices (instal-ling) ..................................................... 364Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Reading lamp ..................................... 127Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 153Rear fog lamp

Switching on/off ........................... 122Rear seats

Adjusting ....................................... 108Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 376Function/notes ............................. 224Switching on/off ........................... 225

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 114Dipping (automatic) ....................... 115

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 151Switching on/off ........................... 150

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 134Switching on/off ........................... 133

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 455Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Important safety notes .................. 177Refueling process .......................... 178see Fuel

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 361

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 129Overview of bulb types .................. 129Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 130

Reporting safety defects .................... 29Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuelDisplay message ............................ 302Warning lamp ................................. 327see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 151Restraint system

Display message ............................ 293Introduction ..................................... 44Warning lamp ................................. 326Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 98Roller sunblinds ............................... 99Side windows ................................... 94Sliding sunroof ................................. 98Tailgate ............................................ 90

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 299Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 99Rear side windows ......................... 347

Roof carrier ........................................ 345Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 379Roof load (maximum) ........................ 456Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 271

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 61Child restraint systems .................... 62Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 53

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 49Adjusting the height ......................... 48Cleaning ......................................... 379Correct usage .................................. 47Fastening ......................................... 48

Index 17

Important safety guidelines ............. 46Introduction ..................................... 46Releasing ......................................... 49Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 280Warning lamp ................................. 318Warning lamp (function) ................... 49

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 106Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106Cleaning the cover ......................... 378Correct driver's seat position ........ 104Folding the rear bench seat for-wards/back ................................... 337Important safety notes .................. 105Overview ........................................ 105Seat heating problem .................... 110Seat ventilation problem ................ 111Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116Switching seat heating on/off ....... 109Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 110

Securing hooks .................................. 340Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 378Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 375Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 276Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 453Coolant (engine) ............................ 453DEF special additives ..................... 451Engine oil ....................................... 452Fuel ................................................ 448Important safety notes .................. 447Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 455Washer fluid ................................... 454

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 281On-board computer ....................... 277

Setting the air distribution ............... 148Setting the airflow ............................ 148SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 281Side impact air bag ............................. 52Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 299

Side marker lamps (changingbulbs) ................................................. 131Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 375Convenience closing feature ............ 95Convenience opening feature .......... 95Important safety information ........... 93Opening/closing .............................. 94Overview .......................................... 93Problem (malfunction) ..................... 97Resetting ......................................... 96

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 97Opening/closing .............................. 98Problem (malfunction) ................... 101Resetting ......................................... 98see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 83Changing the programming ............. 81Checking the battery ....................... 83Convenience closing feature ............ 95Convenience opening feature .......... 95Display message ............................ 317Door central locking/unlocking ....... 80Important safety notes .................... 80Loss ................................................. 85Mechanical key ................................ 82Overview .......................................... 80Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85Starting the engine ........................ 160

Snow chainsInformation .................................... 403Snow drive program ....................... 248

SocketsCenter console .............................. 349General notes ................................ 349Luggage compartment ................... 350Rear compartment ......................... 350

Specialist workshop ............................ 29Special seat belt retractor .................. 61Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 270

18 Index

In the Instrument cluster ................. 35Segments ...................................... 267Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 277see Instrument cluster

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 131Display message ............................ 299Switching on/off ........................... 123

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 159STEER CONTROL .................................. 77Steering (display message) .............. 316Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 112Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111Button overview ............................... 37Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 267Cleaning ......................................... 378Important safety notes .................. 111Paddle shifters ............................... 172Steering wheel heating .................. 112Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 113Switching on/off ........................... 112

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 172Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 282Stowage areas ................................... 334Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 336Center console .............................. 336Center console (rear) ..................... 336Cup holders ................................... 345Eyeglasses compartment ............... 336Glove box ....................................... 335Important safety information ......... 335Stowage net ................................... 337

Stowage net ....................................... 337Summer tires ..................................... 402Sun visor ............................................ 347Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 278

Suspension tuningAMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 216SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 281

SUV(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 27

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 151

TTachometer ........................................ 267Tailgate

Display message ............................ 316Emergency unlocking ....................... 93Important safety notes .................... 89Limiting the opening angle ............... 93Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 92Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 91Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 90Opening dimensions ...................... 456Power closing .................................. 88

Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 298

Tanksee Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 35

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 447Emergency spare wheel ................. 443Information .................................... 446Tires/wheels ................................. 428Trailer loads ................................... 460Vehicle data ................................... 456

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 356Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 356Downloading routes ....................... 359Emergency call .............................. 353General notes ................................ 352Geo fencing ................................... 360Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 358MB info call button ........................ 355Remote vehicle locking .................. 358

Index 19

Roadside Assistance button .......... 354Search & Send ............................... 357Self-test ......................................... 353Speed alert .................................... 360System .......................................... 353Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 360Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 359Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 358

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 274Display message ............................ 316Menu (on-board computer) ............ 273Number from the phone book ........ 274Redialing ........................................ 274Rejecting/ending a call ................. 274

Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 343Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 266Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 281Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 281Outside temperature ...................... 267Setting (climate control) ................ 147

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 77Immobilizer ...................................... 77

Through-loading ................................ 337Time

see separate operating instructionsTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 282TIREFIT kit .......................................... 384Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 408Checking manually ........................ 407Display message ............................ 312Important safety notes .................. 408Maximum ....................................... 406Notes ............................................. 405Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 386Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 386Recommended ............................... 404

Tire pressure loss warning sys-tem

General notes ................................ 407Important safety notes .................. 407Restarting ...................................... 408

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 410Function/notes ............................. 408General notes ................................ 408Important safety notes .................. 409Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 411Restarting ...................................... 411Warning lamp ................................. 331Warning message .......................... 410

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 422Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 421Bar (definition) ............................... 420Changing a wheel .......................... 423Characteristics .............................. 420Checking ........................................ 401Curb weight (definition) ................. 422Definition of terms ......................... 420Direction of rotation ...................... 423Display message ............................ 312Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 423DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 420DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 421GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 421GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 421GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 421GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 421Important safety notes .................. 400Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 421Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 421Labeling (overview) ........................ 417Load bearing index (definition) ...... 422Load index ..................................... 419Load index (definition) ................... 421M+S tires ....................................... 402Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 421

20 Index

Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 422Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 422Maximum tire load ......................... 419Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 422MOExtended tires .......................... 402Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 422PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 422Replacing ....................................... 423Service life ..................................... 402Sidewall (definition) ....................... 422Speed rating (definition) ................ 421Storing ........................................... 424Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 420Temperature .................................. 416TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 422Tire bead (definition) ...................... 422Tire pressure (definition) ................ 422Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 421Tire size (data) ............................... 428Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 417Tire tread ....................................... 401Tire tread (definition) ..................... 422Total load limit (definition) ............. 423Traction ......................................... 416Traction (definition) ....................... 422Tread wear ..................................... 416TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 422Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 415Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 421Wear indicator (definition) ............. 423Wheel and tire combination ........... 430Wheel rim (definition) .................... 421see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 64Towing a trailer

Active Parking Assist ..................... 224Axle load, permissible .................... 460Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 376

Coupling up a trailer ...................... 259Decoupling a trailer ....................... 261Driving tips .................................... 257ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 74Important safety notes .................. 256Installing the ball coupling ............. 258Mounting dimensions .................... 459Power supply ................................. 263Pulling away with a trailer .............. 161Removing the ball coupling ............ 262Storing the ball coupling ................ 262Trailer drive program ..................... 249Trailer loads ................................... 460

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 393Installing the towing eye ................ 394Removing the towing eye ............... 395With both axles on the ground ....... 395With the rear axle raised ................ 395

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 396Important safety notes .................. 393

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights ............................................... 262Trailer towing

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 244Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 247Blind Spot Assist ............................ 239PARKTRONIC ................................. 219Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 262

Transfer case ..................................... 177Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 168Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 168Transporting the vehicle .................. 395Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 195Driving downhill ............................. 195Maximumgradient-climbing capa-bility ............................................... 195

Index 21

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 378Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 269Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 269Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 270

Trunksee Tailgate

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 297Switching on/off ........................... 123

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 422Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 88From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 87

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 347Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29Data acquisition ............................... 30Display message ............................ 315Equipment ....................................... 25Individual settings .......................... 277Limited Warranty ............................. 30Loading .......................................... 412Locking (in an emergency) ............... 88Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 80Lowering ........................................ 428Maintenance .................................... 26Parking for a long period ................ 185Pulling away ................................... 160Raising ........................................... 425Reporting problems ......................... 29Securing from rolling away ............ 424Towing away .................................. 393Transporting .................................. 395Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 80Vehicle data ................................... 456

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 456Vehicle data (off-road driving)

Approach/departure angle ............ 458Fording depth ................................ 457Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 458

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 456Vehicle emergency locking ................ 88Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 446Vehicle level

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 216

Vehicle level (display message) ....... 304Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSVehicle tool kit .................................. 382Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 273VIN ...................................................... 446

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 321Brakes ........................................... 320Check Engine ................................. 327Coolant .......................................... 328Distance warning ........................... 330DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 330ESP® .............................................. 323ESP® OFF ....................................... 324Overview .......................................... 36PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 45Reserve fuel ................................... 327Restraint system ............................ 326Seat belt ........................................ 318Tire pressure monitor .................... 331

Warranty .............................................. 25Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 316

22 Index

Wheel and tire combinationsee Tires

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 428Wheel chock ...................................... 424Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 423Checking ........................................ 401Cleaning ......................................... 374Cleaning (warning) ......................... 424Emergency spare wheel ................. 440Important safety notes .................. 400Interchanging/changing ................ 423Mounting a new wheel ................... 427Mounting a wheel .......................... 424Overview ........................................ 400Removing a wheel .......................... 427Storing ........................................... 424Tightening torque ........................... 428Wheel size/tire size ....................... 428

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 294Operation ......................................... 52

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 149Infrared reflective .......................... 364

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 370Notes ............................................. 454

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 136Rear window wiper ........................ 133Replacing the wiper blades ............ 133Switching on/off ........................... 132

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 190Snow chains .................................. 403

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 402Overview ........................................ 402Radiator cover ............................... 367Snow drive program ....................... 248

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 402

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 375Important safety notes .................. 133Replacing ....................................... 133Replacing (rear window) ................ 134Replacing (windshield) ................... 134

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 378Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 149

Index 23

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

24 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 446).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

Introduction 25

Z

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

26 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or when

the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-nificantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.

Introduction 27

Z

When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hot

parts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevicesmust accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,

28 Introduction

the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair work

Ralterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

Introduction 29

Z

The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may include

information about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which

30 Introduction

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee-ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR,and special equipment is required. In additionto the vehicle manufacturer, other partiesthat have the special equipment, such as lawenforcement, can read the information byaccessing the vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-ing the EDR component may result in a mal-function of the SRS Module and other sys-tems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As of

February 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 31

Z

32

Cockpit ................................................. 34Instrument cluster .............................. 35Multifunction steering wheel ............. 37Center console .................................... 38Overhead control panel ...................... 41Door control panel .............................. 42

33

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 172

; Combination switch 123

= Instrument cluster 35

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 168

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 217

C Overhead control panel 41

D Climate control systems 138

E Ignition lock 157Start/Stop button 158

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 111

G Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 111Steering wheel heating 112

H Cruise control lever 196

I Opens the hood 366

J Diagnostics connection 28

K Electric parking brake 184

L Light switch 120

M Night View Assist Plus 235

34 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer with seg-ments 267

; Fuel gage

= Tachometer 267

Function Page

? Coolant temperature 266

A Multifunction display 268

B Instrument cluster lighting 266

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam head-lamps 121

; T Parking lamps 122

= ÷ ESP® 323

? K High-beam head-lamps 124

A Electric parking brake (red) 326F (USA only)! (Canada only)

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 326

C · Distance warning 330

D #! Turn signals 123

E h Tire pressure monitor 331

Function Page

F 6 Restraint system 44

G ü Seat belt 318

H % Diesel engine: pre-glow 160

I ? Coolant 328

J R Rear fog lamp 122

K ; Check Engine 327

L 8 Reserve fuel 327

M å ESP® OFF 323

N ! ABS 321

O Brakes 320$ (USA only)J (Canada only)

36 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 268

; COMAND display; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 273Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function Page

A =;

Selects a menu 2679:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 267a

To confirm your selection 267Hiding display messages 284

B %

Back 267Switches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 37

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions

; c Seat heating 109

= s Seat ventilation 110

? c PARKTRONIC 217

A ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion 162

Function Page

B £ Hazard warninglamps 124

C 4 5 PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 45

D å ESP® 73

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

i Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package

Function Page

F Cup holder 345Ashtray 348Cigarette lighter 348Socket 349

G COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

H d ON&OFFROAD menubutton 255

I + LOW RANGE off-roadgear 253

Function Page

J Á Level control 206

K Ã DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) 250

L p Manual drive program 173

M Selector wheel for on-roadprograms 247Selector wheel for off-roadprograms 251

N Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 336

Center console 39

Ataglance

i Vehicleswithout theON&OFFROADpack-age and AMG vehicles

Function Page

F Cup holder 345Ashtray 348Cigarette lighter 348Socket 349

G COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

H Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 172Selects the drive program(AMG vehicles) 172

Function Page

I Ã DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) 250

J Á Level control (vehi-cles with AIRMATIC pack-age) 213

K e Adaptive DampingSystem (vehicles with AIR-MATIC package) 212à Adjusts AMG adap-tive damping system (AMGvehicles) 216

L Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 336

40 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 127

; c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 128

= u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 128

? | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 128

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 127

B 2 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 983 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 99

Function Page

C Eyeglasses compartment 336

D F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 354

E G SOS button (mbracesystem) 353

F ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 355

G Rear-view mirror 114

H Buttons for the garage dooropener 363

I Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and Voice Con-trol System1

1 Voice Control System only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instruc-tions.

Overhead control panel 41

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 87

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 87

= r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel (memory func-tion) 116

? Adjusting the seats 105

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 114

Function Page

B W Opens/closes theside windows 94

C q Opens/closes thetailgate 92

D n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 67

42 Door control panelAt

aglance

Useful information .............................. 44Panic alarm .......................................... 44Occupant safety .................................. 44Children in the vehicle ........................ 61Pets in the vehicle .............................. 67Driving safety systems ....................... 67Theft deterrent locking system ......... 77

43

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi-cle.

Occupant safety

Restraint system: introductionThe restraint system reduces the risk of occu-pants hitting parts of the vehicle interior in theevent of an accident. Furthermore, therestraint system may also reduce the forcesexerted on the vehicle occupants when anaccident occurs.The restraint system includes:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlyoffer the intended level of protection if allvehicle occupants:Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.(Y page 47)Radjust their seat and head restraint prop-erly (Y page 105).

The driver is also responsible for ensuringthat the steering wheel has been correctlypositioned. Observe the information relatingto the correct driver's seat position(Y page 104).Always ensure the air bag can inflate properlyif deployed (Y page 50).An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt and is an additional safety deviceproviding increased protection for vehicleoccupants in appropriate accident situations.For example, if the protection already provi-ded by a correctly fastened seat belt will suf-fice, the air bags are not deployed. Further-more, only the air bags that would increasethe degree of protection afforded to the vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident aredeployed. Seat belts and air bags generally donot protect against objects penetrating thevehicle from the outside.Information on the restraint systemoperationcan be found under "Triggering of belt ten-sioners and air bags" (Y page 58).

44 Occupant safetySafety

See “Children in the vehicle” for informationon children traveling with you as well as vehi-cle restraint systems (Y page 61).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the engine is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:is part of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. They will then not be deployedin the event of an accident.Rdoes not light up: the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled. If, in the event of anaccident, all deployment criteria are met,the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; seethe following points. You must make sure ofthis both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant clas-sification system (OCS)" (Y page 53) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61).There you will also find instructions onbackwards- and forwards-facing childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 53). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags"(Y page 50). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionA correctly fastened seat belt is the mosteffective means of restraining the movementof vehicle occupants in the event of an acci-dent or overturn. This reduces the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle interior or being thrownfrom the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belthelps to keep the vehicle occupants in thebest position in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system consists of:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rear compartmentRBelt force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenlyfrom the belt sash guide, the inertia reellocks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out fur-ther.Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten theseat belts in an accident, pulling them closeagainst the occupant's body. They do not,however, pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.Emergency Tensioning Devices do not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or incorrectlyworn seat belts.When activated, the belt force limiters reducethe force exerted by the seat belt on the vehi-cle occupants.The belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. Thismakes it possible to reduce the forces towhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-

46 Occupant safetySafety

ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual

(Y page 61) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. If possible, adjustthe seat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 334).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 47).

X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; intobelt buckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightenedautomatically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 49).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

48 Occupant safetySafety

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of theshoulder. Adjust the belt sash guide if neces-sary.X To raise: slide the belt guide upwards.The belt guide will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt guide release: andslide the belt guide downwards.

X Let go of belt guide release: in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt guide engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be foundunder "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 61).

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; and guide it back towards beltoutlet=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certaintightening force if any slack is detectedbetween the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off in the on-board computer(Y page 280).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all occupantsmust fasten their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there maybe a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fas-tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds each time the engine isstarted. If, after six seconds, the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as thedriver's and front-passenger seat belts arefastened or a front door is opened again, the7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops after

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

six seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 318).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 58).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.

50 Occupant safetySafety

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system to the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is disabled. If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is permanentlylit, the front-passenger front air bag is dis-abled (Y page 45).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 61) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent the air bag from functioning cor-rectly. Before starting your journey and toavoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: inflates in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger air bag;inflates in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection on the frontseats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 45).Front-passenger air bag; is only deployedif:Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS)recognizes that the front-passenger seat isoccupied (Y page 53)Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not lit (Y page 53)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer-ing column. The driver's knee bag is triggeredtogether with the front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occu-pant in the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; inflate next to the outercushions of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional protection for the thorax. Further-more, on the front seats additional protectionis offered for the pelvis. However, it does notprotect your:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which animpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-ing situations:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied, orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger seat, the side impact airbag on the front-passenger side deploys atthe onset of the applicable accident situation.In this case, it will deploy regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

52 Occupant safetySafety

When deployed, the window curtain air bagoffers additional protection for the head.However, it does not protect your chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that window curtainair bag deployment can offer additional pro-tection to that provided by the seat belt, awindow curtain air bag may deploy in otheraccident situations (Y page 58).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesIn the following situation, the side impact airbag and Emergency Tensioning Device aredisabled: the OCS system detects that thefront-passenger seat is occupied, but the seatbelt tongue is not inserted in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat.

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning ofthe child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. The entire base of thechild restraint systemmust always rest on theseat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forwards-facing child restraintsystemmust, as far as possible, be resting onthe backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:informs you whether the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock, or press the Start/Stop but-

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

ton once or twice on vehicles with KEY-LESS-GO.The system carries out a self-diagnosis.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampthen displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag. If the status of thefront-passenger front air bag changes whilethe vehicle is in motion, an air bag displaymessage may appear in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 295). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront air bag both before and during the jour-ney.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. They will then not be deployedin the event of an accident.Rdoes not light up: the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled. If, in the event of anaccident, all deployment criteria are met,the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, the child could, in theevent of an accident:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

54 Occupant safetySafety

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to 12 months old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis deactivated.But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in astandard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampcan go out after the system self-test. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is activated. The result of the classifi-cation is dependent on, among other fac-tors, the child restraint system and thechild's stature. It is recommended that youinstall the restraint system on a suitablerear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up and remains litafter the system self-test depending on theresult of the classification or, alternatively,goes out.- if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is off, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person of small stature can sit ona rear seat.

- if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after thesystem self-test. This indicates that thefront-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 61).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light up during the system self-test, then the system is malfunctioning. Thefront-passenger front air bag might be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident withhigh deceleration. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-

facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta-tus of the front-passenger front air bag(Y page 53).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 57).

56 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 55).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied by theweight of a child upto 12 months old in achild restraint sys-tem

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos-sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, donot install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.It is recommended that you install the restraint system on asuitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of anypassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and asmall amount of powder may also be

released. The 6 restraint system warninglamp will light up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder released is generally nothazardous to health, it could however causeshort-term breathing difficulties in peoplewith asthma or other respiratory problems. Inorder to prevent breathing difficulties, youshould leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so, or open the window.Air bags and pyrotechnic seat belt tensionerscontain perchlorate material, which mayrequire special handling or environmentalprotection measures. Check with your localgovernment’s disposal guidelines. Californiaresidents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RDurationRDirectionRIntensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the belttensioners in the event of a frontal or rearcollision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint system components are readyfor operation, see “Restraint system warn-ing lamp” (Y page 45)Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckleon the respective front seat

The belt tensioners in the rear compartmentare triggered independently of the lock statusof the seat belts.

58 Occupant safetySafety

If the restraint system control unit detects ahigh accident severity, additional compo-nents of the restraint system are activatedindependently of one another in certain fron-tal collision situations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindowbag, if the system determines thatit can offer additional protection to thatprovided by the seat belt

Depending on the person occupying the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag isactivated or deactivated. The front-passengerfront air bag can only be deployed in an acci-dent if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp is off. Observe the information on thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp(Y page 45).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag fills with propellant gas which reducesthe risk of injury. The second stage is thentriggered within milliseconds, filling the frontair bag with the maximum amount of propel-lant gas.The deployment thresholds for the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags arecalculated on the basis of the vehicle decel-eration or acceleration occurring at variouspoints in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-tive in nature. The air bag must be deployedon time, at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rdistribution of the force during the impactRcollision angleRdeformation characteristics of the vehicleRcharacteristics of the object with which thevehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter the collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an airbag,nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.

The vehicle may be considerably deformedwithout an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only relatively easily deformable partshave been hit and a high rate of decelerationhas not been reached. Conversely, an air bagmay be deployed even though the vehicle suf-fers only minor deformation. This is the caseif, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such asthe longitudinal body members are hit in anaccident and the rate of deceleration is suffi-cient.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or an overturn situation, the rel-evant restraint system components are acti-vated independently of one another depend-ing on the apparent type of accident. If addi-tional protection for the vehicle occupants isdetermined in this situation, the belt tension-ers are also triggered.RSide impact air bags on the side of the col-lision, regardless of Emergency TensioningDevice and use of the seat belt on the driv-er's side and the outer seats on the secondrowThe sidebag on the front-passenger sidedeploys under the following conditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue has engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat.

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of thecollision, regardless of seat belt use andwhether front-passenger seat is occupiedRWindowbags on the driver's and front-passenger sides in certain overturn situa-tions if the system determines that theycan offer additional protection to that pro-vided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The various air bag systems workindependently of each other.

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration, and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptive measures to protect thevehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-ger that the seats and/or objects could bedamaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event ofan accident cannot be ruled out. Alwaysadapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Active Driving Assis-tance package: if BAS PLUS intervenespowerfully or the radar sensor systemdetects an imminent danger of collision incertain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof andthe side windows are closed so that only asmall gap remains. The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel is completelyclosed.Rvehicles with the memory function: thefront-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavorable position.Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the airpressure in the side bolsters of the seatbackrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul-ticontour seats, the air pressure in the sidebolsters is reduced again. All settings madeby PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Infor-mation about the convenience function canbe found under "Belt adjustment"(Y page 49).

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rby activating the hazard warning lampsRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are lowered

60 Occupant safetySafety

Rin vehicles with a memory function: theelectrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 47).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt fits properly with-out a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor. When activated, the specialseat belt retractor ensures that the seat beltcannot slacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the belt buckle release button, holdthe belt tongue and guide it back towardsthe belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesIf you install a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the center rear seat, the rear armrest must be folded back as far as possible.You can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 334).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There youwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install child seatsaccording to themanufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem has a Top Tether belt, this should be usedat all times.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seats or the rear seat backrests arenot locked, they could fold forwards in theevent of an accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. As a result, childrestraint systems cannot perform their inten-ded protective function. Rear seats and rearseat backrests that are not locked can alsocause additional injuries, e.g. in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always lock the rear seats and rear seatbackrests after installing a Top Tether belt.Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjustthe rear seat backrests so that they are in anupright position.

Top Tether anchorage points

Top Tether anchorage points? are on therear side of the rear seat backrests.

X Move head restraint= upwards.X Fit the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Make sure youobserve the child restraint system manu-facturer's installation instructions.

X Route Top Tether beltB under headrestraint= between both head restraintbars.

X Guide Top Tether beltB downwardbetween cargo compartment cover: andrear seat backrests;.

X Hook Top Tether hookA of Top Tether beltB into Top Tether anchorage?.Make sure that:RTop Tether hookA is hooked into TopTether anchorage?, as shownRTop Tether beltB is not twistedRwhen cargo compartment cover: isinstalled, Top Tether beltB, runs

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

between rear seat backrests; andcargo compartment cover:Rwhen the safety net is installed, TopTether beltB runs between rear seatbackrests; and the safety net.

X Tension Top Tether beltB. Make sure youobserve the child restraint system manu-facturer's installation instructions.

X If necessary, push head restraint= backdown slightly (Y page 108). Make sure youdo not interfere with the correct routing ofTop Tether beltB.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system to the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 53).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint systemmustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, lieflat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be put under strainby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. The shoul-der belt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the vehicle belt sash guide.If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sashguide and the front-passenger seat accord-ingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 66)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 67)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

66 Children in the vehicleSafety

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp; is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 68)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)(Y page 69)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distancewarning function and adaptive BrakeAssist) (Y page 70)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 73)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 75)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 75)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 77)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safety sys-tems can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Drivingsafety systems are merely aids designed toassist driving. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speedand for braking in good time. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand weather conditions and maintain a safedistance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay special atten-tion to the notes on tires, recommendedminimum tire tread depths, etc.(Y page 400).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 320) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 285).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

Off-road ABSAn ABS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 251).At speeds below 20mph (30 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS)

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equip-ped with DISTRONIC PLUS.For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensorsystem must be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.BAS PLUS can help you tominimize the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or reduce the effectsof such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects adanger of collision, you are assisted whenbraking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the last possi-ble moment.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-fic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to sta-tionary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

If you have activated DSR (Y page 250), BASPLUS is likewise deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofAdaptive Brake Assist and the distance warn-ing function, which are described in the fol-lowing.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 275).

If the distance warning function is not activa-ted, theæ symbol appears in the assis-tance graphics display.The distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. Thedistance warning function cannot prevent acollision without your intervention.Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you ifyou rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of about 40mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react tostationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRnew vehicles or after the COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST system has been serv-icedObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 156).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-

sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking dur-ing hazardous situations at speeds above4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensorsystem to evaluate the traffic situation.With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

Should you approach an obstacle and Adap-tive Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-sion, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakes vigo-rously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automati-cally increase the braking force to a level suit-able for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive BrakeAssist requires particularly high brake pres-sure, preventive passenger protection meas-ures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simultane-ously.Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike

Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRnew vehicles or after the COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST system has been serv-icedObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 156).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.In appropriate driving situations, activate theoff-road program (Y page 251).

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem)A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 251).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate thevehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on abrake test dynamometer. Switch off theignition.Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operatethe vehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up continu-ously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 323) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 285).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To switch off: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch on: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Off-road ESP® (vehicles with Off-RoadEngineering package)

An ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (Y page 251).Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if thereis oversteering or understeering, thus improv-ing traction.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inAMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation.ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking andlimiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).

74 Driving safety systemsSafety

ESP® trailer stabilization does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-ses the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 321) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 287).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 210) andhill start assist (Y page 161).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.

For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system must be opera-tional.With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collisionwith a vehicle ahead, andreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,youwill bewarned visually and acoustically aswell as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you also brake. Automaticemergency braking cannot prevent a colli-sion. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example inparking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 276).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the·

distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performeduntil immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

If you have activated DSR (Y page 250), PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated.

76 Driving safety systemsSafety

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided in partic-ular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 67).

No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the engine if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted when the starter battery is fully

charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To deactivate using the SmartKey:unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Todeactivate usingKEYLESS-GO: unlockthe vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe tailgateRthe hood

Theft deterrent locking system 77

Safety

Z

X To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey:press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

78 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Useful information .............................. 80SmartKey ............................................. 80Doors .................................................... 86Cargo compartment ............................ 89Side windows ...................................... 93Sliding sunroof .................................... 97

79

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-perature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise,the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system isarmed again.

X To lock centrally: press button:.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe tailgateRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 279).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 278).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).

KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle by periodically establish-ing a radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey. This happens:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.

Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 95).If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, onlythe cargo compartment of the vehicle isunlocked.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds until

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z

the battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 83).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 81).

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 83).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 77).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To deactivate the alarmwith the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-tion lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 88)Runlocking the cargo compartment(Y page 93)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 88)

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard-ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 83).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 82).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

SmartKey 83

Openingandclosing

Z

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing first andthen press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart-Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 83) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 83).

X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% or& button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% or& button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 83) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 83).

X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using themechanical key.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 389).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 391).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 334).

86 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 66).If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-Key orwith KEYLESS-GO, opening a door fromthe inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 77).

X Front door: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

X Rear door: pull up locking knob: on therelevant rear door.The rear door is unlocked and can beopened.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The buttons are located onboth front doors.

: To unlock; To lockX To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a front door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked.If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-ing button for the central locking, or has beenlocked automatically, and a door is openedfrom the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

Doors 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Automatic locking feature

X To disarm: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To arm: press and hold button; for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 279).

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and trunk lidinto their locks automatically even if they areonly partly closed.X To power close a door: push the door intothe lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the tailgate: lightly pressthe tailgate downwards.Power closing will pull the tailgate fullyclosed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 77).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 82).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 87).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.

88 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 82).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 456).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 334).Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. You could otherwise lock yourselfout.Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate:the tailgate can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRunlocked from inside with the emergencyrelease

For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgateyou can:Rclose the tailgate manually from outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom insideRunlock the tailgate from inside with theemergency releaseRlimit the opening angle of the tailgate

Cargo compartment 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Tailgate reversing feature

On vehicles with tailgate remote closing fea-ture, the tailgate is equipped with automaticobstacle recognition with a reversing feature.If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgatewhen automatically opening or closing, thisprocedure is stopped. If the tailgate is stop-ped during the closing procedure, it will openagain automatically. The automatic obstaclerecognition with reversing function is only anaid. It is not a substitute for your attentive-ness when opening and closing the tailgate.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver’s door, orRpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate, orRpull the handle on the tailgate

Opening and closing manually fromoutside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle:.X Raise the tailgate.Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: ifyou pull handle: and then release it, thetailgate opens automatically.

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using recess:.X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.

90 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 456).

i Notes on the reversing feature for the tail-gate (Y page 90).

Opening the tailgate automaticallyYou can open the tailgate automatically withthe SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the tailgate opens.

orX If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handleand let it go again immediately.

Closing the tailgate automatically

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

Closing and locking button (example: vehicle withEASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO)

Cargo compartment 91

Openingandclosing

Z

X To close: press closing button: on thetailgate.

orX Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the tailgate closes.

Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate andKEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously closeand lock the tailgate.X Press locking button; on the tailgate.If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outsidethe vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks.All the doors must be shut and the Smart-Key located in the vicinity of the tailgate.i The tailgate cannot be opened and closedwith the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey inthe ignition.If the tailgate touches an object while clos-ing, the closing procedure is interruptedand the tailgate reopens.

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thecargo compartment, the tailgate will notlock.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.

Rpress the closing or locking button on thetailgate.Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 456).

i Notes on the reversing feature for the tail-gate (Y page 90).

Opening and closing

You can open and close the tailgate from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch:for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.

X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press remote operating switch for tail-gate: until the tailgate is closed.

92 Cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Limiting the opening angle of the tail-gate

Important safety notes

! Make sure there is sufficient clearance toopen the tailgate fully when setting theopening angle. The tailgate could otherwisebe damaged. Ideally, set the opening angleoutside.

ActivatingYou can limit the opening angle of the tail-gate. This is possible in the top half of itsopening range, up to approximately 4 in(10 cm) before the stop.This could be useful, for example, if there isinsufficient space above the tailgate.X To open the tailgate: pull the handle onthe tailgate.

X To stop the opening procedure at thedesired position: press the closing button(Y page 91) in the tailgate or pull the handleon the outside of the tailgate again.

X To store the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until you heara short tone.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button(Y page 91) in the tailgate until you heartwo short tones.

Tailgate emergency release

Important safety notes

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 456).

If the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.

Opening

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 82).

X Insert mechanical key; into the openingin paneling:.

X Turn mechanical key; 90° clockwise.X Push mechanical key; in the direction ofthe arrow and open the tailgate.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 88),the cargo compartment is also locked.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

Side windows 93

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press/pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 67).

94 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functions simultane-ously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the vehicle. Forvehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the Smart-Key must be near the driver's door handle.

Convenience openingX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trapped

in the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:RRelease the& button to interrupt theclosing procedure.RPress and hold the% button to open.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exteriordoor handle to interrupt the closing proce-dure.RTo open, pull the same door handle imme-diately and hold it firmly. The door windowsand the sliding sunroof will open for as longas the door handle is held but the door isnot opened.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 94)Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 98)

Using the SmartKeyThe SmartKey must be in the vicinity of thevehicle, on vehicles without KEYLESS-GO theSmartKey must be near the door handle.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or the

Side windows 95

Openingandclosing

Z

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed. (Y page 94)

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 94).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly. Ifthis is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

96 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun-roof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Sliding sunroof 97

Openingandclosing

Z

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window. The noise will bereduced or eliminated.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press the2 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by operating the switch again.When opening and raising the roof, auto-matic operation is only available if the slid-ing sunroof is in the closed position.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Resetting

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

98 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 98).

X Keep the2 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again (Y page 98).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open (Y page 100).X To open and close: turn the SmartKey toposition 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press the2 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by operating the switch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only beopened and closed together when the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isclosed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects such assmall fingers. This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone being trap-ped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

Sliding sunroof 99

Openingandclosing

Z

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sun-blinds

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the2 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press/pull the2 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic opera-tion is started in the corresponding direc-tion. You can stop automatic operation bypressing/pulling the switch again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds

! If the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel and the roller sunblinds cannot befully opened or closed after resetting, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeReset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel and the roller sunblinds if the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel orthe roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the2 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the2 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the2 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the2 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel (Y page 99) and theroller sunblinds (Y page 100) can be fullyopened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

100 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the2switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the2switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-ture.

i Note on the automatic reversing feature of the sliding sunroof (Y page 98).

Sliding sunroof 101

Openingandclosing

Z

102

Useful information ............................ 104Correct driver's seat position .......... 104Seats .................................................. 105Steering wheel .................................. 111Mirrors ............................................... 114Memory function .............................. 116

103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 105).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint. Also makesure that you have adjusted the headrestraint so that the back of your head is asclose to the head restraint as possible. Thiswill be the case if the head restraint isadjusted correctly (Y page 107).

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 111).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 111)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 112)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 46).

104 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 48).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 114).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 116).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular could

accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,

Seats 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i It is not possible to remove the headrestraints from the front seats. The rear-compartment head restraints, however,can be removed (Y page 108).

For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RImportant safety notes on air bags(Y page 50)RCargo compartment enlargement (fold-ing down the rear bench seat)(Y page 337)RSecuring children in the vehicle(Y page 62)

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® has been triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 116).

Adjusting the head restraints

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 105).

106 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.

There are several notches.X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button: and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged in posi-tion.i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-callyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 106) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the fore/aft position of thehead restraint: push or pull the headrestraint in the direction of arrow;.i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,press release catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraints

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seatbackrests

You can adjust the angle of the backrests inthe second row of seats. There are ten detentpositions to choose from.X Pull the left or right release lever;upwards in the direction of the arrow untilrelevant backrest: is fully released.

X Pull backrest: forwards in the direction ofthe arrow and allow it to engage.

X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,lean firmly against backrest:.

Adjusting the multicontour seatYou can set the multicontour seat usingCOMAND. See the separate COMAND Oper-ating Instructions.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour

108 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Rear seats

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 95). The seat ven-tilation of the driver's seat automaticallyswitches to the highest level.

110 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Steering wheel 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)The steeringwheel can also be adjustedwhenthe SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 113)RStoring settings (Y page 116)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in thedirection of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,the steering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switchoff the ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

112 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The steering wheelheating has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function positionbuttons. This function is only available onvehicles with memory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-puter (Y page 279).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition or

Steering wheel 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

when you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 116).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Thismakes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescuethe occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 279).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.

For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are heated automaticallyif the rear window defroster is switched onand the outside temperature is low.

114 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 280).X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer:(Y page 280)

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold button forfolding the mirrors: (Y page 115) untilyou hear a click and then themirror engagein position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 114).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

i Themirrors do not go into anti-glaremodeif reverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Mirrors 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.X Bring the vehicle to a standstill.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control of

116 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

the vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 112) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 114).

X Press theMmemory button and then pressone of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

The memory function can still be used if theSmartKey has been removed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press the button for storage position1,2 or3. Keep pressing until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbuttons.

Memory function 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

118

Useful information ............................ 120Exterior lighting ................................ 120Interior lighting ................................. 127Replacing bulbs ................................. 129Windshield wipers ............................ 132

119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-metrical lights, the edge of the road is not litas widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back to asym-metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible aftercrossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 123)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 277)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0.

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on

120 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampà is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the low-beam headlampsand parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 277).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Exterior lighting 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps

3 T Parking lamps, license plate andinstrument cluster lighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-led by the light sensor

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

122 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampX To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

Exterior lighting 123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

High-beam headlamps

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive HighbeamAssist is active, itcontrols activation of the high-beam head-lamps (Y page 126).

High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

124 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-ated five times (Y page 132) while the lightsare on and the engine is running. When youswitch off the ignition, the automatic head-lamp cleaning system is reset and counting isresumed from 0.

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to the steer-ing movements of the front wheels. In thisway, relevant areas remain illuminated whiledriving. This allows you to recognize pedes-trians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the low-beam headlampsare switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Exterior lighting 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users that

have lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and the

126 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

light sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambient light-ing can be adjusted using the on-board com-puter (Y page 278).

Interior lighting 127

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Automatic interior lighting control

Overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on: set the switch to centerpositionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 279).

Manual interior lighting control

Overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch the front interior lighting on:set the switch to the c position.

X To switch the interior lighting off: set theswitch to the| position or (if the door isclosed) to the center position.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

128 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hot

Ryou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 129). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 129

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W BV? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W

Tail lamp: Brake lamp: P 21 W-L

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housingYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Remove securing pin; using a suitabletool.

X Slide cover: up and remove it.X To install: insert cover: again and slide itdown until it engages.

X Insert securing pin;.

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 130).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

130 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 130).

High-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Pull lever= upwards and remove bulbholder;.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Simultaneously press bulb holder; andpull lever= downwards.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Parking lamps/standing lamps (halo-gen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Pull out bulb holder;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder;.X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Side marker lamps

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 130).

X Turn cap; counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Pull out bulb holder:.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder:.X Align cap; and turn it clockwise until itengages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 130).

Replacing bulbs 131

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the service flap

Left-hand service flap

Right-hand service flap

You must open the service flap in the cargocompartment before you can change thebulbs in the brake lamp.X To open: release service flap: at the top,e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it down-ward in the direction of the arrow.

X Right side: remove the first-aid kit before-hand and pull the parcel net down.

X To close: reinsert service flap:.

Brake lamp

X Switch off the lights.X Open the cargo compartment.X Open the service flap (Y page 132).X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Take bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Close the service flap (Y page 132).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

132 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wipers to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Rear window wiper switch2 b To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 157).

X Turn switch: on the combination switchto the corresponding position.When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield/rear window.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.

Windshield wipers 133

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull wiperblade; upwards from thewiper arm in thedirection of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade: in the retaineron the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe direction of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm: away from the rear win-dow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade; at a right angle towiper arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade;.

134 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Installing a wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade; onto wiperarm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade; parallel to wiperarm:.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the rear win-dow.

Windshield wipers 135

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

136 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 138Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 138Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 144Setting the air vents ......................... 152

137

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 151).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 95).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the residual heat func-tionmay be activated automatically an hourafter the SmartKey has been removed inorder to dry the air-conditioning system.The vehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes.

138 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 147); To defrost the windshield (Y page 149)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 149)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 144)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 150)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 147)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)D To set the air distribution (Y page 148)E To increase the airflow (Y page 148)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)

Overview of climate control systems 139

Climatecontrol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 147); To defrost the windshield (Y page 149)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 144)

To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 151)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 150)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 147)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)D To set the air distribution (Y page 148)E To increase the airflow (Y page 148)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)

Rear control panel: To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic; To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off

140 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

= To direct the airflow through the rear air vents? To direct the airflow through the footwell vents

Optimum use of dual-zone automaticclimate controlThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of the dual-zoneautomatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps intheà and¿/Á buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp above theá button goesout.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for approx-imately three seconds at the bottom of thescreen in the COMAND display. See alsothe separate COMAND operating instruc-tions. You will see the current settings ofthe various climate control functions.

During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 163).

Overview of climate control systems 141

Climatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

USA onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 147); To defrost the windshield (Y page 149)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 149)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 144)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 150)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 147)C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)E To set the air distribution (Y page 148)F To increase the airflow (Y page 148)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)H DisplayI To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 147)J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)

Rear control panelL To increase the airflow (Y page 148)M To set the temperature (Y page 147)N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 146)O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 148)P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 148)Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)R To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)

142 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 147); To defrost the windshield (Y page 149)= To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 151)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 144)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 150)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 147)C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 149)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144)E To set the air distribution (Y page 148)F To increase the airflow (Y page 148)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)H DisplayI To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 147)J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 151)K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 146)

Rear control panelL To increase the airflow (Y page 148)M To set the temperature (Y page 147)N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 146)O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 148)P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 148)Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144)R To reduce the airflow (Y page 148)

Overview of climate control systems 143

Climatecontrol

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovetheà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side and the rear com-partment as well. The indicator lamp abovetheá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for approx-imately three seconds at the bottom of thescreen in the COMAND display. See alsothe separate COMAND operating instruc-tions. You will see the current settings ofthe various climate control functions.

During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 163).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 146).

In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control on and off using theà and^ buttons.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.

144 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivating

Example:¿ buttonX To activate: press the¿/Á button.The indicator lamp in the¿/Á but-ton lights up.

X To deactivate: press the¿/Á but-ton.The indicator lamp in the¿/Á but-ton goes out. The "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 145

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿/Á buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera-tion if cooling with air dehumidification is alsoactivated. If necessary, cooling with air dehu-midification can be deactivated.In the rear compartment, you can also switchclimate control for the rear seats to automaticmode using theà button.

Activating/switching

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press the_ button.

orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.

3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you can select aclimate mode (Y page 147).

146 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Adjusting the climate mode settingsYou can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draft

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in the dis-play.

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orBclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 139).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe front: turn control: orB clockwiseor counter-clockwise (Y page 142).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the frontcontrol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.

X Turn control: clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 142).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the rear compartmentand the front-passenger side.

X To increase/decrease the rear compart-ment temperature using the rear con-trol panel: turn controlM clockwise orcounter-clockwise on the rear controlpanel (Y page 142).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Operating the climate control systems 147

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsFront control panelP Directs the airflow through the center

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster and center vents (Canadaonly)

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center and footwell air vents(Canada only)

Rear control panelM Directs the airflow through the rear

center and rear side air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i Using the rear control panel, you can alsoactivate both air distribution positionssimultaneously. In order to do this, pressboth air distribution buttons. The air is thenrouted through all rear air vents.

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

Adjusting

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflow

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

i You can use 3-zone automatic climatecontrol to set the airflow in the rear com-partment separately.

148 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Switching the ZONE function on/off

X To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttonlights up.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

X To switch off: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls: orB clockwise or coun-ter-clockwise:Dual-zone climate control (Y page 139)3-zone automatic climate control(Y page 142)

orX Press theK orI button.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.

Operating the climate control systems 149

Climatecontrol

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road buttonÙagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿/Á cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe "windshield defrosting" function(Y page 149).i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the dis-play.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

150 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Activating/deactivating

The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To activate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button lightsup.i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone automatic climate control only) or at

high outside temperatures, air-recircula-tion mode is automatically activated. Whenair-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically, the indicator lamp in thedbutton is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-tedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the station-ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after theengine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the set interior temperature.

Operating the climate control systems 151

Climatecontrol

Switching on/off

X Toactivate:press theÌ/Ábutton.The indicator lamp in theÌ/Á but-ton lights up.i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ/Á but-ton.The indicator lamp in theÌ/Á but-ton goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and inthe engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such asice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels=and? to the right or left.

152 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for side air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-cle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "coolingwith air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, temper-ature-sensitive items stored in the glovebox could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air ventWhen automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel:clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rear com-partment

Example: center vents with rear control panel: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel; to theleft or right.

Setting the air vents 153

Climatecontrol

Z

154

Useful information ............................ 156Notes onbreaking-in a newvehicle............................................................. 156Driving ............................................... 156Automatic transmission ................... 168Refueling ............................................ 177Parking ............................................... 182Driving tips ........................................ 186Driving systems ................................ 195Towing a trailer ................................. 256

155

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speed lim-its.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

156 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to pro-tect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid

driving at full throttle when the engine iscold.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engineAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 320).If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. Thesteering is then locked. To unlock, remove theSmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey when the engine isswitched off.The starter battery could otherwise be dis-charged.

If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.

Driving 157

Drivingandparking

Z

X Check the starter battery and recharge ifnecessary (Y page 389).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 391).

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button intothe ignition lock, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can impair the functionality of the KEY-LESS-GO key.Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 346).Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not berecognized.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryouwill not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-ton on the front door (Y page 87), you cancontinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

i The engine can be turned off while thevehicle is inmotion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for approximatelythree seconds. This function operates inde-pendently of the ECO start/stop automaticengine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lock

158 DrivingDrivingandparking

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 320).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position.

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.i The ignition is switched off when:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position.

= Start/Stop button USA? Start/Stop button Canada

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between KEY-LESS-GO mode and SmartKey operationwhen the transmission is in position P.

X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart-Key is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using theStart/Stop buttonRelectrically powered equipment can beoperated.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Driving 159

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

General notes

i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: thecatalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 168).The transmission position display in themultifunction display showsP (Y page 168).

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyX To start a gasoline engine: turn theSmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock(Y page 157) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

X To start a diesel engine: turn the Smart-Key to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 157).The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the% preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the SmartKey to position 3(Y page 157) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

i You can start the engine without preglowif the engine is warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X To start a gasoline engine: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 158) once.The engine starts.

X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 158).Preglow is activated and the engine starts.

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in the vehi-cle. This mode for starting the engine oper-ates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine start function.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R(Y page 168).

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake (Y page 184) isautomatically released.

160 DrivingDrivingandparking

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe parking lock released. If the brakepedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECTlever can still bemoved but the parking lockremains engaged.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 279).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Pulling away with a trailer

To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake.X Press and hold handle:.The electric parking brake continues tobrake and prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter remains on.

X Depress the accelerator pedal.X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combinationis held by the driving force of the engine,release lever:.The electric parking brake is released.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

Driving 161

Drivingandparking

Z

ECO start/stop function (all vehiclesexcept the ML 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC)

IntroductionThis section describes the ECO start/stopfunction for all vehicles except the ML 250BlueTEC 4MATIC. Information about the ECOstart/stop function on the ML 250 BlueTEC4MATIC (Y page 164).The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-cally if the vehicle stops moving.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.

If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 163) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,the¤ symbol is not displayed.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.For further information on automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 162) and automaticengine start (Y page 163).

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rno off-road program has been selected.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol willbe shown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stopped auto-matically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automatic

162 DrivingDrivingandparking

stop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

i All vehicles (apart fromAMGvehicles):automatic engine switch-off can take placeamaximumof four times consecutively (ini-tial stop then repeated three times). The¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-tifunction display after the engine has beenstarted automatically for the fourth time.When the¤ symbol is shown in green inthemultifunction display, automatic engineswitch-off is again possible.

i AMG vehicles: times which the enginecan be automatically switched off.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Rin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of positionP.Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMGvehicles).Ryou switch to an off-road program (exceptfor AMG vehicles).Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; and the¤ ECO sym-bol in the multifunction display go out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If all conditionsfor automatic engine switch-off(Y page 162) are fulfilled, the¤ symbolis shown in green in the multifunction dis-play.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-tifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.

Driving 163

Drivingandparking

Z

AMG vehicles

X To switch off: in drive program C, pressECO button:.

orX Switch to drive program S or M(Y page 172).Indicator lamp; and the¤ ECO sym-bol in the multifunction display go out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive pro-gram S orM is active, the automatic trans-mission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-tifunction display.If the conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are not all fulfilled (Y page 162),the¤ symbol is lit yellow. If this is thecase, the ECO start/stop function is notavailable.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.

ECO start/stop function (ML 250BlueTEC 4MATIC)

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, the¤ symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.For further information on automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 165) and automaticengine start (Y page 165).

164 DrivingDrivingandparking

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rno off-road program has been selected.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stopped auto-matically.

i The HOLD function can also be activatedif the engine has been switched off auto-matically. It is then not necessary to con-tinue applying the brakes during the auto-matic stop phase. When you depress theaccelerator pedal, the engine starts auto-matically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

i The engine can be switched off automat-ically a maximum of four times (first stopand three subsequent stops) in succession.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Rin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of positionP.Ryou switch to an off-road program.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO buttonX To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

Driving 165

Drivingandparking

Z

If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,the ECO start/stop function has been deac-tivated manually or as the result of a mal-function.

166 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKeyin the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 391).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a gaso-line engine:The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 369). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The current trans-

mission position P, R,N orD appears in thetransmission position display (Y page 168)in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and, in AMG vehicles,drive program C or S.

Transmission position and drive program display: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into which transmis-sion positions you can change using theDIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD to R, fromR toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

168 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and remove the SmartKey.Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open one of the frontdoors.Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicleis stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system, observe the following notes:Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.

Automatic transmission 169

Drivingandparking

Z

RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.RRelease the brake pedal.RRemove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.RDepress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 182) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P. Have thevehicle electronics checked imme-diately at a qualified specialistworkshop.The automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKeyRswitch off the engine when in Ror D and open one of the frontdoors

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

170 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brake pedal will allowyou to move the vehicle freely, e.g.to push it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey or the Start/Stopbutton, the automatic transmissionshifts to neutral N automatically.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 172)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 171)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengearsD and Rmay help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to amaximum of 5mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R,move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and downpast the point of resistance.

Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speedrange on uphill gradients.

X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-ent, use left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 172) to select a lower gear,even if cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUSare activated.

Automatic transmission 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Program selector button

General notes

Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD packageX Press program selector button:.The letter M appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The manual drive program M isactivated.

AMG vehiclesX Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving character-istics.In AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.

i The permanent drive program M is avail-able on the following vehicles:RVehicles with theON&OFFROAD packageRAMG vehicles

Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 174).As well as this permanent drive programM,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 173).

i AMG vehicles: the automatic transmis-sion switches to automatic drive programCeach time the engine is started.

Drive program on vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package

M Manual Permanent manual gear-shifting

Drive programs on AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Permanent manual gear-shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 173).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program, you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;.Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 174).

172 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Further information about temporary driveprogram M (Y page 173).

i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive programs E and SDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters. The transmissionmust be in posi-tion D.

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): youcan activate manual drive program M usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.AMGvehicles: you can activatemanual driveprogramM in automatic drive programsC andS.Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:if manual drive program M is deactivatedusing the program selector button, you canactivate manual drive program M using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.

i As well as temporary drive program M,you can also activate permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 172).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 174).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 172).Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear and M appear inthe multifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-mission immediately shifts into the next geardown or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatic

Automatic transmission 173

Drivingandparking

Z

transmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deacti-vated, the automatic transmission shifts intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected.

You can also deactivate manual drive pro-gram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 172).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX AMG vehicles: use the program selectorbutton to change the drive program(Y page 172).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe drive program that was last selected, Cor S.

orX Vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package: use the selectorwheel to switch to the on-road program(Y page 247) or the off-road program(Y page 251).

Manual drive program

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D.

i As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M (Y page 173).

Switching on the manual drive programIn manual drive program M, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersif the transmission is in position D. You cansee the currently selected drive program andwhich gear is engaged in the multifunctiondisplay.

174 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

X AMG vehicles: press the program selectorbutton (Y page 172) untilM appears in themultifunction display.

X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: press the program selector button(Y page 172).The letter M appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Shifting up (all vehicles except AMGvehicles)

X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in themultifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts to rec-ommended gear;.

Shifting up (AMG vehicles)

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-tion display changes to red and the UPUP dis-play message is shown, shift up a gear.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

Maximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects theoptimum gear according to the speed.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts down.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ifyou apply full throttle, the automatic trans-mission shifts up to the next gear when themaximum engine speed is reached. Thisprevents the engine from overrevving.

Automatic transmission 175

Drivingandparking

Z

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off themanual drive programX Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: press the program selector button(Y page 172).TheMmessage in themultifunction displaygoes out.

X AMG vehicles: press the program selectorbutton (Y page 172) repeatedly until C or Sappears in the multifunction display.

176 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Transfer case! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system,the engine and ignition must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when theelectric parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer (maximum10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 177

Drivingandparking

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a gasoline engine. Do notswitch on the ignition if you accidentallyrefuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel system. Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could result indamage to the fuel system and the engine.The repair costs are high. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 448).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 177).The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you open or close the vehiclewith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

178 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Fuel type to be used? Tire pressure tableX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.This corresponds to key position 0: "keyremoved".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fillerneck is designed for refueling at diesel fill-ing pumps.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes.In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 327).A message appears in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 302).For further information onwarning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 327).

Refueling 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tankThis section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptionsof and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and removeit immediately (Y page 157).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

Important notes on useTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment must be operated with thereducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of thetasks performed during maintenance. Undernormal operating conditions, a tank of DEFlasts until the next service due date.When the supply of DEF is almost used up, theCheckCheck AdditiveAdditive SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmessage is shown in the multifunction dis-play.If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph(16 km/h), the CheckCheck AdditiveAdditive SeeSee Oper‐Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual message goes out afterapproximately one minute.When the supply of DEF is down to a reserveof approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) the RefillRefillAdBlue/DEFAdBlue/DEF SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmes-sage is shown in the multifunction display.When theDEF supply drops to aminimum, theRemaining Starts: 16Remaining Starts: 16 message is shownin the multifunction display.If the Refill AdBlue/DEF No Start inRefill AdBlue/DEF No Start inXXXX kmXXXX km message is shown in the multifunc-tion display, you can still drive the vehicleover the distance shown. If DEF is not refilled,you will subsequently be unable to start theengine. If the Refill AdBlue/DEF Eng.Refill AdBlue/DEF Eng.

Start Not PossStart Not Poss message appears in themultifunction display and the engine does notstart, you must add DEF.X Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec-onds.

X Start the engine.

i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Use the special DEF refill bottle when addingDEF between maintenance intervals. Contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center withany questions or, if necessary, contact Road-side Assistance (Y page 26).If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF isfrozen and there is an active warning indica-tor, it may not be possible to add DEF. Parkthe vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage,until DEF has become fluid again. It will thenbe possible to add DEF again. Alternatively,have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaustgas aftertreatment andDEF is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

180 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Important safety notes on the refillingprocedureDEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You may expe-rience a burning sensation in your eyes, noseand throat. Coughing and watering of theeyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.DEF must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing and must not be swal-lowed. Keep DEF away from children.If you or other persons come into contact withDEF, observe the following:RRinse DEF from your skin immediately withsoap and water.RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse yourmouth out immediately. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek medical assistance withoutdelay.RChange out of clothing contaminated withDEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withDEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.

! The vehicle must be parked on levelground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tankcan only be filled as intended with the vehi-cle parked on a level surface. This avoidsfalse level readings. Filling the tank is not

permitted if the vehicle is not parked on alevel surface. There is a danger of overfill-ing, which could result in damage to com-ponents of the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment.

! Rinse surfaces that have come into con-tact with DEF immediately with water orremove DEF using a damp cloth and coldwater. If the DEF has already crystallized,use a sponge and coldwater to clean it. DEFresidues crystallize after time and contam-inate the affected surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not beadded to the fuel tank. If DEF is added tothe fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-age.

For further information on DEF, see(Y page 451).You will find further information on DEF in theprinted Operator's Manual under "Technicaldata".

Opening the DEF filler cap

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you open or close the vehiclewith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn blue DEF filler cap; counter-clock-wise and remove it.DEF filler cap; is secured with a plasticstrip.

Refueling 181

Drivingandparking

Z

DEF refill bottle

! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-tight. It could otherwise be damaged.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refillbottle:.

X Place DEF refill bottle: on the filler neckas shown and screw it on clockwise untilhand-tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle: towards the fillerneck.The DEF tank is filled. This may take up toone minute.i When DEF refill bottle: is no longerpressed, filling stops and the bottle may betaken off again after being only partiallyemptied.

X Release DEF refill bottle:.X Turn DEF refill bottle: counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refillbottle: again.

DEF refill bottles can be obtained at many gasstations or at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Refill bottles without a threaded capdo not provide overfill protection. DEF mayleak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers spe-cial refill bottles with a threaded seal. Theseare available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Closing the DEF filler cap

X Mount DEF filler cap; on the filler neckand turn it clockwise.

X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in thedirection of arrow:.

X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).The Check Additive See Operator'sCheck Additive See Operator'sManualManual message goes out after approx-imately one minute.i If the Check Additive See Opera‐Check Additive See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual message continues to beshown in the multifunction display, youmust add more DEF.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerably

182 ParkingDrivingandparking

more effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Using the SmartKeyX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i If you turn off the engine with the Smart-Key and then remove it from the ignitionlock or open a front door, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

i If you turn off the engine with the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmissionshifts toN. If you then open one of the frontdoors, the automatic transmission shifts toP.

i In the event of an emergency, the enginecan be turned off while the vehicle is inmotion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.

Parking 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contacta qualified specialist workshop.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake isengaged, theF (USA only) or!(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.i The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 157) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button.

To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake (Y page 161).

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is applied auto-matically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary

184 ParkingDrivingandparking

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt isnot fastened.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

i The electric parking brake is not automat-ically engaged if the engine is switched offby the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released auto-matically when all of the following conditionsare fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehi-cle will start to move.

Emergency braking

X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake.

The vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.

i The vehicle is braked for as long as thehandle of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.

Parking 185

Drivingandparking

Z

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.

186 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.

Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant, observe thegearshift recommendations.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there are

Driving tips 187

Drivingandparking

Z

fewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 270).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying lightpressure to the pedal. This results in exces-sive and premature wear to the brake pads.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You then have to depress the brake pedalmore firmly. Maintain a greater distance fromthe vehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

188 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-eter. If you are planning to have the vehicletested on such a dynamometer, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center toobtain further information first. Otherwise,you could damage the drive train or thebrake system.

! Because ESP® is an automatic system,the engine and ignition must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when theelectric parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer (maximum10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To doso, depress the brake pedal firmly when driv-ing at a high speed. This improves the grip ofthe brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 68) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 69).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on AMG vehicles.The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt

Driving tips 189

Drivingandparking

Z

your driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe the# brake wear warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and note any brake status mes-sages in the multifunction display. Especiallyfor high performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:set the raised level before driving throughstanding water.

Off-road fording

! Under no circumstances should youaccelerate before entering the water. Thebow wave could cause water to enter anddamage the engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doorswhile fording. Otherwise, water could getinto the vehicle interior and damage thevehicle's electronics and interior equip-ment.REstablish how deep the water is and thecharacteristics of the body of water beforefording.RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:select the highest possible vehicle level.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place andat a steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed throughthe water.RDo not stop.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form asyou drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread afterfording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 457).

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.

190 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:if driving in snow or with snow chains, selectthe snow program (Y page 248) with the off-road program selector wheel in the centerconsole.

i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do notcover the radiator, e.g. with a protectivecover. The measuring function of theonboard diagnosis system may otherwiseprovide inaccurate values. Some of thesevalues are required by law and must there-fore always be accurate.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 403).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 402).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 402).

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center ofgravity is raised. This could cause the vehicleto tip over more easily on uphill or downhillgradients. There is a risk of an accident.Select the lowest possible vehicle level.

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possiblymixedwith oil, for example, could getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and alsoin increased wear and tear. The braking char-acteristics change depending on the materialingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes afterdriving off-road. If you detect a reduced brak-ing effect or grinding noises, have the brakesystem checked in a qualified specialist work-shop as soon as possible. Adapt your drivingstyle to the different braking characteristics.

Driving tips 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly or sys-tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter-rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damageto the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. You could lose controlof the vehicle if you attempt to brake usingthe service brake. If the gradient is too steep,drive backwards in reverse gear.

General notesRead this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving overmoregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristicsof your vehicle and the gear shift operationbefore driving through difficult terrain.The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:ROff-road program 1 and 2 (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 251)RLOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package)(Y page 253)RDifferential lock (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 252)ROff-road ABS (Y page 68)ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 73)RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level)(Y page 211)RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)(Y page 250)

Observe the following notes:RStop the vehicle before starting to drivealong an off-road route.RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC pack-age: select a vehicle level that is suitablefor the off-road terrain. To avoid damagingthe vehicle, make sure there is always suf-ficient ground clearance.

RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 339).RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-vate DSR (Y page 250).RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windowsand sliding sunroof closed while driving.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. Therougher, steeper or more ruts on the ter-rain, the slower your speed should be.RDrive slowly and at an even speed throughthe water. Ensure that a bowwave does notform as you drive.RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road routes where visibility is poor. Forsafety reasons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey the off-road route.RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks,holes, tree stumps and furrows.RCheck the depth of water before fordingrivers and streams.RWhen fording, do not stop and do notswitch off the engine.ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the roll-ing resistance. Otherwise the vehicle'swheels could become stuck in looseground.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this willinterrupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a slope.RDo not shift the automatic transmission totransmission position N.

i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. TheHOLD function cannot hold the vehicle onsuch surfaces.

Checklist before driving off-road

! If the engine oil warning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion, stop the vehi-cle in a safe place as soon as possible.

192 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Check the engine oil level. The engine oilwarning lampwarningmust not be ignored.Continuing the journey while the symbol isdisplayed could lead to engine damage.

X Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.When driving on steep gradients, theengine oil level must be sufficiently high toensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle.

X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check thelevel and top up if necessary (Y page 180).

X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jackis working and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth and tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from thewheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in aloss of tire pressure and damage the tirebead. Therefore, check your rims beforedriving off-road and replace them asrequired.

Checklist after driving off-road

! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: activate the on-road program(Y page 251).

X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 253).

X Deactivate DSR (Y page 250).X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:lower the vehicle to a ride height suitablefor the road conditions, e.g. to the high-way/high-speed level.

X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet andremove any foreign objects.

X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and thevehicle underside with a water jet; checkfor any foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts ofplants have become trapped. Theseincrease the risk of fire and can damagefuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail theentire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,bodywork structure, steering, chassis andexhaust system for damage.

X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.

X If you detect strong vibrations after off-roadtravel, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and remove them ifnecessary. Foreign objects can disturb thebalance and cause vibrations.

Driving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving on nor-mal roads. After driving off-road, check thevehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accident toyourself and other road users.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: select off-road program 1(Y page 251).RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:select a raised vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.

Driving tips 193

Drivingandparking

Z

RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter to shift to a lower gear appropriateto the terrain.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos-sible. Make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- the ground clearance of the vehicle issufficient.

Tire ruts and gravel roads

! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package:select a raised vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassyarea, if possible.

Driving over obstacles

! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger shouldalways keep a safe distance from the vehi-cle when doing so in order to avoid injury asa result of unexpected vehicle movements.After driving off-road or over obstacles,check the vehicle for possible damage,especially to the underbody and the com-ponents of the chassis.

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and other obsta-cles:RSelect the LOW RANGE (Y page 253) off-road gear.RRaise the vehicle level.RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.RDrive very slowly.RDrive straight over the center of obstacles.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

RObserve the rules on off-road driving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclinesor gradients, but instead follow the directline of fall. The maximum gradient-climbingcapability of your vehicle is 100%, whichcorresponds to an approach/departureangle of 45°. Note that the climbing abilityof your vehicle depends on the terrain con-ditions.

194 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

RWhen driving down an incline, make use ofthe engine's braking effect. Observe theengine speed; do not overrev the engine.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-hill gradients, select the LOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 253).RDrive slowly.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appro-priate engine speeds (maximum3,000 rpm).RUse the left-hand paddle shifter to shift intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients.RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-roaddriving.

i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill.For further information about hill startassist, see (Y page 161).

Do not switch to transmission position Nwhen driving off-road. If you try to brake thevehicle using the service brake, you couldlose control of the vehicle. If the gradient istoo steep for your vehicle, drive back down inreverse gear.Always observe the approach/departureangle values (Y page 458).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climb-ing ability values (Y page 458).

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the accelerator immedi-ately before reaching the brow of the hill. Usethe vehicle's own impetus to drive over thetop of the hill.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steepinclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tipand rollover.RShift to a lower gear using the left-handpaddle shifter before tackling steep down-hill gradients.RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brakegently. When doing so, make sure that thevehicle is facing in the direction of the lineof fall.RCheck that the brakes areworking normallyafter a long downhill stretch.

i The special off-road ABS setting enables aprecise, brief and repeated locking of thefront wheels. This causes them to dig intoloose earth. Be aware that the front wheelseasily skid across the ground surface ifcompletely braked and therefore lose theirability to steer.

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. You mustselect a lower gear in good time on long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doingso, you will make use of the braking effect ofthe engine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

i Cruise control should not be activatedwhen driving off-road.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.RDSR must be deactivated.Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated(vehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage).

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining a speed

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

You can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou activate DSRRyou activate off-road program 2 on vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD packageRyou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS-TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.You must select a lower gear in good time onlong and steep downhill gradients, especiallyif the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehicle

in front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS-TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS-TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,for vehicle speed, for braking in good time andfor staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated(vehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage).RDSR must be deactivated.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down= .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed or down= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: past

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

the pressure point for a higher speed ordown= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

When driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, for example because it haschanged lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactiva-ted. You will hear a warning tone if this is thecase.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS PassivePassivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away with DIS-TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down= .

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsoautomatically be shifted into position P.

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistance

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 205).X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that youmaintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front ifnecessary.

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DIS-TRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec-tedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-

passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRyou activate DSRRyou activate off-road program 2 on vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD packageRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐DIS‐TRONICTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage in the multifunc-tion display for approximately five seconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu of the on-board com-puter, you can select the assistance display.X Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 275).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS activatedIn the Assistance menu of the on-board com-puter, you can select the assistance display.

X Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 275).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONICPLUS.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:Rcornering, going into and coming out of abendRvehicles traveling on a different lineRother vehicles changing lanesRnarrow vehiclesRobstructions and stationary vehiclesRcrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary. DIS-TRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,

because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Level control (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

Important safety notesLevel control adapts the vehicle level auto-matically to the current operating and drivingsituation. This results in reduced fuel con-sumption and improved handling.

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicleto adjust to the new level as quickly as pos-sible.The vehicle level may change visibly if youpark the vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, the vehi-cle level is lower; with an increase in temper-ature, the vehicle level rises.If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for load dis-crepancies while still parked. However, forsignificant level changes, such as after thevehicle has been stationary for a long period,the engine must be on. For safety reasons,the vehicle is only loweredwhen the doors areclosed. Lowering is interrupted if a door isopened, and it continues once the door hasbeen closed.For information about driving off-road, see(Y page 191).

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-cle could rollover more easily, for example ona bend. There is a risk of an accident.Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-ble and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics can be significantly impaired. Youcould also exceed the permissible vehicle

height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk ofan accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time.Make sure there is always sufficient groundclearance. You will otherwise damage thevehicle.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than a per-son wearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants shouldalways wear your seat belts.

Basic settingsThe extent to which the vehicle is raised orlowered depends on the basic setting selec-ted.Select:Rhighway/high-speed level for driving onnormal roadsRoff-road level 1 for driving on easily nego-tiable off-road terrainRoff-road level 2 for driving on normal off-road terrainRoff-road level 3 for freeing the vehicle inparticularly rough terrain at low speedsonly

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

The individual vehicle levels differ from high-way level as follows:Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+ 30 mm)Roff-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+ 60 mm)Roff-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm)

Highway/high-speed level

! Make sure that there is enough groundclearance when the vehicle is being low-ered. It could otherwise hit the ground,damaging the underbody.

: Selector wheel; To raise the level= Indicator lamps? To lower the levelX Start the engine.X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

If one or more indicator lamps= are on:X Turn selector wheel: counter-clock-wise? until all indicator lamps= that arelit start to flash.The vehicle is lowered to highway level. Assoon as the next lowest level is reached,the indicator lamp stops flashing and goesout.

During the adjustment, the LoweringLowering mes-sage, for example, appears in the multifunc-tion display.If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear. Once highway level has beenreached, all indicator lamps= go out.The vehicle automatically selects highwaylevel if you are driving at a speed above70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a speedbetween 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph(115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level ifyou are traveling at higher speeds.

Off-road levels

General notesROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-road in particularly rough terrain.RAdjust your driving style to the altered han-dling characteristics.RDo not drive at speeds above 12 mph(20 km/h).

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Only select an off-road level when this isappropriate for road conditions. Otherwise,fuel consumption increases and handlingmaybe affected.X Start the engine.X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To raise: turn selector wheel: clock-wise;.The vehicle is raised.

orX To lower: turn selector wheel: counter-clockwise?.The vehicle is lowered.

Indicator lamps= for the desired off-roadlevel flash:ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lampflashesROff-road level 2: the lower and center indi-cator lamps flashROff-road level 3: all three indicator lampsflash

The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level selec-ted. As soon as an off-road level is reached,the corresponding indicator lamp stops flash-ing and lights up constantly.

Raising the vehicleDuring the adjustment, the Vehicle RisingVehicle Risingmessage, for example, appears in the multi-function display.The vehicle rises from highway level to off-road level 1.If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.

i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide themessages using the% ora buttonon the multifunction steering wheel.

Once off-road level 2 has been reached, thelower and center indicator lamps of the selec-tor wheel are on.

While the adjustment from off-road level 2 tooff-road level 3 is taking place, you will see amessage such as the following in the multi-function display: Vehicle Rising Max.Vehicle Rising Max.Speed 12 mph (20 km/h)Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h)Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h) mes-sage draws your attention to the maximumspeed permitted for off-road level 3.Once off-road level 3 has been reached, youwill see a message shown in white in the mul-tifunction display, for example: Max.Max. SpeedSpeed12 mph (20 km/h)12 mph (20 km/h).If you drive above 20 km/h at off-road level 3,you will see the following message shown inred in the multifunction display: VehicleVehicleLoweringLowering Max.Max. SpeedSpeed 1212 mph (mph (2020 km/h)km/h).i You cannot clear these messages.You also hear a warning. The vehicle is low-ered and off-road level 3 is canceled.If you continue to increase your speed, thered message continues to be shown in themultifunction display. The newly set level isnot displayed until the vehicle has been set toa level suitable for the current speed.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

Lowering the vehicle

If you maintain or reduce your speed, you willsee a message in white in the display whilethe vehicle is being lowered, such as the fol-lowing: Lowering Max. Speed 12 mphLowering Max. Speed 12 mph(20 km/h)(20 km/h).The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.If you select an off-road level when driving attoo high a speed, the Drive More SlowlyDrive More Slowlymessage appears in the multifunction dis-play .You can select from the following:ROff-road level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph(100 km/h)ROff-road level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph(65 km/h)ROff-road level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph(20 km/h)

If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) ordrive between 40mph (65 km/h) and 50mph(80 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds, off-road level 2 will be canceled. The vehicle islowered to off-road level 1.You will see a message in the multifunctiondisplay, for example: LoweringLowering.If you are driving above 70mph (115 km/h) ordrive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be canceled.Depending on the vehicle's speed and theADS mode selected (Y page 212), the vehicleis automatically lowered to highway or high-speed level.

You will see a message in the multifunctiondisplay, for example: LoweringLowering.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. TheHOLD function cannot hold the vehicle onsuch surfaces.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 211).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until: disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsobe automatically shifted into position P.

AIRMATIC package

General notesAIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle.As well as level control (Y page 213), yourvehicle can be equipped with ADS (AdaptiveDamping System) (Y page 212) and ACTIVECURVE SYSTEM (Y page 212).Observe the notes on driving with a trailer(Y page 257).

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

ADS (Adaptive Damping System)

General notesADS adapts the damping characteristics tothe current operating and driving situation.This depends on:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRthe ADS settingRthe vehicle level settingYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage: Suspension tuning button; Indicator lamp for sports tuning= Indicator lamp for comfort tuningX Start the engine.X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected. The vehicle is low-ered by 0.6 in (15 mm).

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

Comfort tuning

Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage: Suspension tuning button; Indicator lamp for sports tuning= Indicator lamp for comfort tuningX Press button:.Indicator lamp= lights up. Comfort tuningis selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in(15 mm).

In comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. There-fore, select this mode if you favor a morecomfortable driving style. Select comfortmode alsowhen driving fast on straight roads,e.g. on straight stretches of highway.

Active Curve SystemThe Active Curve System uses active stabil-izers to optimize both driving comfort andvehicle agility. Depending on the ADS modeselected (Y page 212), the Active Curve Sys-tem also changes the setting.If you select ADS comfort mode:Rrolling movement is reduced in the event ofchanging surface undulationsRthe roll angle when cornering is reducedRthe driving style is agileIf you select ADS sport mode:Rthe roll angle is reduced significantlyRthe driving style is even more agile

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Level control

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the vehicle raised, thedriving characteristics could be impaired bythe vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehi-cle could rollover more easily, for example ona bend. There is a risk of an accident.Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-ble and adjust your driving style.

G WARNINGWhen you drive with the chassis lowered orraised, the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics can be significantly impaired. Youcould also exceed the permissible vehicleheight if the chassis is raised. There is a risk ofan accident.Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

! When driving on extremely rough terrain,select a high vehicle level in good time.Make sure there is always sufficient groundclearance. You will otherwise damage thevehicle.

! When you raise the vehicle in such a waythat not all wheels have contact with theground, remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.RUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than a per-son wearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants shouldalways wear your seat belts.

General notesFurther information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 191).Level control adapts the vehicle level auto-matically to the current operating and drivingsituation. This results in reduced fuel con-sumption and improved handling.If you select ADS comfort mode (Y page 212),the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level asthe speed increases. As the vehicle speeddecreases, the vehicle is raised back up tohighway level.If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 212),the vehicle skips highway level and lowersdirectly to high-speed level depending on thebasic setting (Y page 214).Make changes to the vehicle level while thevehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicleto adjust to the new level as quickly as pos-sible.The vehicle level may change visibly if youpark the vehicle and the outside temperaturechanges. If the temperature drops, the vehi-cle level is lower; with an increase in temper-ature, the vehicle level rises.If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, thevehicle begins to compensate for load dis-crepancies while still parked. However, forsignificant level changes, such as after thevehicle has been stationary for a long period,the engine must be on. For safety reasons,

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

the vehicle is only loweredwhen the doors areclosed. Lowering is interrupted if a door isopened, and it continues once the door hasbeen closed.

Basic settings (excluding AMG vehicles)The extent to which the vehicle is raised orlowered depends on the basic setting selec-ted. Select raised level for off-road driving orhighway/high-speed level for normal roads.The individual vehicle levels differ from high-way level as follows:Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm)Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm)Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm)

Basic settings for AMG vehiclesThe extent to which the vehicle is raised orlowered depends on the AMG adaptive sportsuspension setting selected. Select theraised level for off-road driving or highway/high-speed level for normal roads.The raised level corresponds to a vehicle levelraised by 50 mm when compared with high-way level in comfort mode.

Raised level

Only select raised level if this is appropriatefor the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel con-sumption may increase and handling may beaffected.X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; flashes. The vehicle risesto raised level.

During the adjustment, the Vehicle RisingVehicle Risingmessage, for example, appears in the multi-function display.If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.Once the vehicle has reached raised level,indicator lamp; remains lit. The VehicleVehicleRisingRising message disappears from the multi-function display.If you try to select raised level at a speedabove 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive MoreDrive MoreSlowlySlowlymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Highway/high-speed level! Make sure that there is enough groundclearance when the vehicle is being low-ered. It could otherwise hit the ground,damaging the underbody.

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Level control button; Level control indicator lampX Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; flashes. The vehicle isadjusting to highway/high-speed level.

During the adjustment, the LoweringLowering mes-sage, for example, appears in the multifunc-tion display.If you press the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel, the messagewill disappear.Once highway level has been reached, indi-cator lamp; goes out. The LoweringLowering mes-sage disappears from the multifunction dis-play.The vehicle automatically adjusts to highwaylevel when you:Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately20 seconds.

Depending on the ADS mode selected(Y page 212), the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level at high speeds.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGThe vehicle is lowered if:Ryou have selected the Comfort or Sportsuspension tuning andRlock the vehicle after switching off theengine

Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or theunderbody may thus become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you switchoff the engine.

! The vehicle is lowered by approximately10 mm if:Ryou have selected the Sport or Comfortsuspension tuning andRyou switch off the engine and thenRlock the vehicleWhen parking, position your vehicle so thatit does not make contact with the curb asthe vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicle levelLevel control adapts the vehicle level auto-matically to the current operating and drivingsituation. Level control ensures the best pos-sible suspension and constant ground clear-ance, evenwith a laden vehicle. This improvesdriving safety and fuel consumption.The AIRMATIC package and ACTIVE CURVESYSTEM are always components of AMGadaptive suspension system (Y page 211).Due to the sportier suspension settings com-pared to standard vehicles, the levels andspeed thresholds for sinking and raising thevehicle are different.In Comfort and Sport driving modes, afterlocking the vehicle it lowers to the Sport+level. When locking the vehicle at the raisedlevel, the vehicle does not lower.The settings will remain stored after youswitch off the engine. When starting theengine, the selected setting, e.g. AMG adap-tive suspension system Comfort, is restored.

i The vehicle level may change visibly if youpark the vehicle and the outside tempera-ture changes. If the temperature drops, thevehicle level lowers; with an increase intemperature, the vehicle level rises.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +or Comfort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sport mode

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button: once.Indicator lamp; lights up. You have selec-ted Sport mode.The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORTSPORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this mode pref-erably when driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and; are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and; light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode. The vehicle islowered by 10 mm.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If indicator lamp; lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode. The vehicle islowered by 10 mm.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Comfort modeIn comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. Selectthis mode if you prefer a comfortable drivingstyle. Select comfort mode also when drivingfast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of freeway.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and; go out.You have selected Comfortmode. The vehi-cle is raised by 10mmcomparedwith Sport+ suspension tuning.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTAMG Suspension System COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-TRONIC does not detect such objects whenthey are in the immediate vicinity of thevehicle. You could damage the vehicle orthe objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.

PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRRelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 375).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is in theroof lamp in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Towing a trailer

! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer towhitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-ures the minimum detection range to anobstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-pling.

PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds,and the indicator lampin the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 375).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention can assist you duringparking.Youmay also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 217).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. When maneu-vering, parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in the area inwhich you aremaneuvering.

When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 218) warning messages during theparking procedure.RAt any time, you can intervene in the steer-ing procedure to correct it. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parking

procedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 217).Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces parallel to the directionof travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automat-ically when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer thanyour vehicle

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you by inter-vening actively in the steering. If you do notbrake there is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times.When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist active Select DPark Assist active Select DObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist active AcceleratePark Assist active Accelerateandand brakebrake ObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist active Select RPark Assist active Select RObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.

222 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the ParkPark AssistAssist switchedswitched offoffmes-sage appears and a warning tone sounds.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions. When ActiveParking Assist is finished, you must steeragain yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionposition D. The vehicle redirects and doesnot drive as far into the parking space.Should the gear change occur too soon toachieve a sensible parking position, theparking procedure will be aborted.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Ryou need to have parked using Active Park-ing Assist.Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb stone is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvered into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.

X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, beingready to brake at all times. Do not exceed amaximum speed of approximately 6 mph(10 km/h) when exiting a parking space.Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, beingready to brake at all times.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-ter console (Y page 219).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbolgoes out and the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.

Towing a trailerFor vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min-imum length for parking spaces is slightlyincreased.

If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,you should not use Active Parking Assist.Once the electrical connection is establishedbetween your vehicle and the trailer, ActiveParking Assist is no longer available. PARK-TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the handle on thetailgate.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the COMANDdisplay.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.

224 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

X To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the function "show rearview camera display" is selected inCOMAND.

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.

X To change the function mode for vehi-cles with trailer tow hitch: using the

COMAND controller, select symbol: forthe "Reverse parking" function or sym-bol; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see theseparate COMAND operating instructions).The symbol of the selected function is high-lighted.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Driving systems 225

Drivingandparking

Z

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional messages for vehicles with PARK-TRONIC: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARK-TRONIC is operational (Y page 218), an addi-tional operational readiness indicator willappear in COMAND display;. If the PARK-TRONIC warning displays are active or lightup, warning displays: and= are also activeor light up correspondingly in the COMANDdisplay.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

226 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 10 in (0.25m) from the rear of thevehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 225).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully back up until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

Turning the steering wheel: Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-

ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

; Parking space markingX Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 225).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-

ing space until red guide line: reachesparking space marking;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-

ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

Driving to the final position: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

Driving systems 227

Drivingandparking

Z

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 10 in (0.25m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

! The following distance specificationsrefer to trailer tow hitches with ball cou-pling that have been approved for this vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may dif-fer if you use other ball couplings. In thiscase, take into account that actual distan-ces will not match the following distancespecifications. Otherwise you could dam-age the trailer and vehicle.

: Vehicle center point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 3 ft(1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar= Ball couplingThis function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch.X Set the height of trailer drawbar; so thatit is slightly higher than ball coupling=.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front oftrailer drawbar;.

: Ball coupling; Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball cou-pling

= Trailer drawbar marker assistant? Trailer drawbarA Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"

functionX Use the COMAND controller to select sym-bolA, see the separate operating instruc-tions for COMAND.The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-ted. The distance specifications now only

228 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

apply to objects that are at the same levelas the ball coupling.

X Back up carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar marker assistant= pointsapproximately in the direction of trailerdrawbar?.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar?reaches red guide line;.

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 257).

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir-rors

The cameras capture the immediate sur-roundings of the vehicle. The system sup-ports you, e.g. when parking or if vision isrestricted at an exit.The 360° camera images can be shown in fullscreenmode or in seven different split-screenviews on the COMAND display. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle.This view is calculated from the data suppliedby the installed cameras (virtual camera).The seven split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and picture from the front camera(without displaying the maximum steeringwheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles withtrailer tow hitch)

Rtop view and rear-view images from theexterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and forward-view images from theexterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)

i The top view and trailer view are availablefor vehicles equipped with a trailer towhitch.

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from position D or R to N, yousee the previous view in the COMAND dis-play. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360° camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.The 360° camera may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not atall. It cannot show objects in the followingareas:Runder the front bumperRvery close to the front bumperRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on thetrunk lidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsYou are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to your surround-ings when parking and maneuvering. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwiseendanger yourself and others.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded in

Driving systems 229

Drivingandparking

Z

Rif the tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-eraRCOMAND is switched on, see the separateCOMAND operating instructionsRthe 360° Camera360° Camera function is activatedActivating the 360° camera using theSYS buttonX Press and hold the W button for longerthan 2 seconds, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image fromthe front cameraRfull screen display with the image fromthe rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX Press the W button, see the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

X Select SystemSystem by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW to con-firm.

X Select 360° camera360° camera and pressW to con-firm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

For further information about the COMANDcontroller, see the separate COMAND oper-ating instructions.

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automati-cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMAND, seethe separate COMAND operating instruc-tions.

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The COMAND display shows the areabehind the vehicle in split screen:Rvehicle with guide linesRtop view of the vehicle

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysX To switch between split screen views:switch to the line with the vehicle icons bysliding Z V the COMAND controller.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller andselect one of the vehicle symbols.

230 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X To switch to full screen mode: selectFull ScreenFull Screen by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW to con-firm.

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

D BumperThe guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 231

Drivingandparking

Z

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

B Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of thevehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis-tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with images from the exteriormirror cameras

: Symbol for the setting with the top viewand forward view from the exterior mirrorcameras

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exteriormirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the trailer view setting; Trailer drawbar marker assistant= Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball cou-pling

232 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Wide-angle function

Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC dis-play: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rear

view camera image; PARKTRONIC warning displayIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 219), warn-ing displays; in the COMAND display arealso active or light up accordingly.PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,orRin the full screen view, on the right-handside at the bottomas red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

i The full screen display can also be selec-ted as front view.

Exiting 360° camera display modeAs soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activa-ted, the function switches off. The COMANDdisplay switches back to the previously selec-ted view. You can also switch the display byselecting the& symbol in the display andpressingW the COMAND controller to con-firm.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). IfATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicatorsof fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion on the part of the driver, it suggests youtake a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Driving systems 233

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 276).

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.ATTENTIONASSIST is activated automaticallyafter the engine is started up.

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: Attention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon-dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST stilldetects typical indicators of fatigue orincreasing lapses in concentration.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by thenormal headlamps, Night View Assist Plususes infrared light to illuminate the road.Night ViewAssist Plus camera:picks up theinfrared light and displays a monochromeimage in COMAND. The image displayed inCOMANDcorresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see theroad's course and any obstacles in good time.If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedes-trians recognized by the system are highligh-ted in the Night View Assist Plus display.Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehi-cles does not affect theNight ViewAssist Plusdisplay in the multifunction display. This isalso the case if you cannot switch on the high-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic.

i Infrared light is not visible to the humaneye and therefore does not glare. NightView Assist Plus can therefore remainswitched on even if there is oncoming traf-fic.

Important safety notesNight View Assist Plus is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving. Do not relyon the Night View Assist Plus display. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Drive carefully and always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand traffic conditions.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,rain, fog or sprayRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinityof the cameraRon bends, on uphill gradients or downhillgradients

234 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Pedestrian recognition may be impaired orinoperative if:Rpedestrians are partially or entirelyobscured by objects, e.g. parked vehiclesRthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the NightView Assist Plus display is incomplete orinterrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflec-tionsRpedestrians do not contrast adequatelyfrom the backgroundRpedestrians are not in an upright position,e.g. sitting, squatting or lying

Activating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditionsYou can only activate Night View Assist Plusif:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.Rit is dark.Rthe light switch is in theà or L posi-tion.Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

X Make sure that COMAND is switched on.X Press button:.The Night View Assist Plus display appearsin the COMAND display.

You can read about how to adjust the bright-ness of the COMAND display in the COMANDoperating instructions.

i The infrared headlamps only switch onwhen the vehicle is being driven at speedsof approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Thismeans that you do not have the full visualrange while the vehicle is stationary andcannot check whether Night View AssistPlus is working.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display; Pedestrian recognized= Framing? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition

i Animals are not recognized by pedestrianrecognition.

Night View Assist Plus is able to recognizepedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. asilhouette in the shape of a person.Pedestrian recognition is then switched onautomatically if:RNight View Assist Plus is activated.Ryou are driving faster than approximately6 mph (10 km/h).Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driv-ing outside built-up areas without streetlighting.

If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol?appears. If pedestrians are detected, they arehighlighted with framing=. If the pedestrianrecognition system has brought a pedestrianto your attention, look through the windshieldto evaluate the situation. The actual distanceto objects and pedestrians cannot be gagedaccurately by looking at a screen.

Driving systems 235

Drivingandparking

Z

Itmay be the case that objects are highlightedas well as pedestrians.

Fogged up or dirty windshieldIf the windshield in front of the camera is fog-ged up or dirty on the inside or outside, theNight View Assist Plus display is affected.X To defrost: check the automatic air condi-tioning settings (Y page 150) and fold downthe camera cover (Y page 377).

X To defrost the inside of the windshield:fold down the camera cover (Y page 377)and clean the windshield (Y page 375).

236 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The picture quality ofNight View Assist Plushas deteriorated.

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 133).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in acar wash.X Clean the windshield (Y page 375).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.X Replace the windshield.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.X Defrost the windshield (Y page 150).

The windshield is iced up.X De-ice the windshield (Y page 149).

There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 375).

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 237) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 239).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive an optical and audible collisionwarning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in therear bumper for monitoring purposes.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void any

Driving systems 237

Drivingandparking

Z

warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcyclesor bicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may be

the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the condition of theradar sensors checked at a qualified special-ist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may other-wise not work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-

238 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 279) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 276) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer,make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connec-tion. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is deactivated. The indicator lamp inthe exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and theBlindBlind SpotSpot AssistAssist CurrentlyCurrently Unavail‐Unavail‐able See Operator's Manualable See Operator's Manual messageappears in the multifunction display.

i You can deactivate the indicator lamps inthe exterior mirrors.

To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lockRthe engine is not runningRthe electrical connection to the trailerhas been established

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

: Lane Keeping Assist cameraLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera:at the top of the windshield. Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andwarns you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion (Y page 277), Lane Keeping Assist isactive starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themilesmiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.

Driving systems 239

Drivingandparking

Z

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 276).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 275) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.

240 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package con-sists of DISTRONICPLUS (Ypage198), ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 241) and ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 244).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem tomonitor the side areas of your vehi-cle which are behind the driver. A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-ted, corrective braking may help you avoid acollision. Before a course-correcting brakeapplication, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu-ates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses radar sensors which arepointed in the direction of travel.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It mayfail to detect some vehicles and is no substi-tute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator trim. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The

Driving systems 241

Drivingandparking

Z

rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram. For this purpose, Active Blind SpotAssist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or spray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the inner edgeof your lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampActive Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp: in the exteriormirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind or

242 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You then hear adouble warning tone and redwarning lamp:flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec-ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing ofred warning lamp:. There are no furtherwarning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display; underliningthe danger of a side collision appears in themultifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehi-cle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicleswithout the ON&OFFROAD package).Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehi-cles with the ON&OFFROAD package).

Driving systems 243

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 279) and Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 276) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer,make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connec-tion. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist isthen deactivated. The indicator lamp lights upyellow in the exteriormirrors and the ActiveActiveBlindBlind SpotSpot AssistAssist CurrentlyCurrently Unavail‐Unavail‐able See Operator's Manualable See Operator's Manual messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle bymeans of camera:at the top of the windshield. Active LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.If you select kmkm in the Display UnitDisplay UnitSpeed-/Odometer:Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-boardcomputer (Y page 277), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take intoaccount the road, traffic and weather condi-tions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid.You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brakingin good time and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.

244 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the roadwayRno vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand there are broken lane markings

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you by

means of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

Driving systems 245

Drivingandparking

Z

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction dis-play.If you leave your lane, under certain circum-stances the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is meant to assist you in bringingthe vehicle back to the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid, recogniz-able lane marking. Before this, a warningmust be given by means of intermittent vibra-tion in the steering wheel. In addition, a lanewith lane markings on both sides must berecognized. The brake application alsoslightly reduces vehicle speed.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.

Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, theelectrical connection to the trailer has beencorrectly established.Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicleswithout the ON&OFFROAD package).Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehi-cles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated(vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. An inappro-priate brake applicationmay be interrupted atany time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 276).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 275) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.When StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:

246 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer,make sure you havecorrectly established the electrical connec-tion. This can be accomplished by checkingthe trailer lighting.

On-road programs (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

General notesThe on-road programs assist you during on-road driving and the off-road programs whendriving off-road (Y page 251).The following program messages remain inthe multifunction display until the corre-sponding vehicle level has been set. Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the program mes-sages using the% ora button on themultifunction steering wheel.

AUTO program

Select the AUTO program for a more com-fortable ride under all normal driving condi-tions.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.AUTO indicator= appears in the multi-function display.RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adaptscomfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and driving condi-tions.RThe automatic transmission selects theautomatic drive program for a comforta-ble driving style that provides for opti-mum fuel consumption.

Driving systems 247

Drivingandparking

Z

SPORT program

Select the SPORT program for sporty,dynamic handling.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.SPORT indicator= appears in the multi-function display.RHigh-speed level, –15 mm compared tohighway level, is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adaptssporty damping characteristics to thecurrent operating and driving conditions.RThe automatic transmission selects theautomatic drive program for a sportydriving style.RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve isselected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no

longer has to be pressed as far to accel-erate.RThe sporty steering curve is selected,e.g. greater force is required when steer-ing.

i You cannot select the SPORT program ifLOW RANGE has been selected. TheDrive Program SPORT Not in LOWDrive Program SPORT Not in LOWRANGERANGE message then appears in the multi-function display.

Snow program

Select the snow program for driving in snowwith or without snow chains.X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.Snow indicator= appears in the multi-function display.

248 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adaptscomfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and driving condi-tions.R4ETS and the differential lock are adap-ted for driving on snow-covered roads.RThe automatic transmission selects theautomatic drive program for a comforta-ble driving style that provides for opti-mum fuel consumption.RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is selec-ted, e.g. the accelerator pedal must bepressed significantly further to acceler-ate.RThe optimum gear for pulling away isengaged.

Trailer program

Select the trailer program when towing atrailer.

X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.Trailer indicator= appears in the multi-function display.RHighway level is set.RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adaptscomfortable damping characteristics tothe current operating and driving condi-tions.RThe automatic transmission selects theautomatic drive program for a comforta-ble driving style that provides for opti-mum fuel consumption, changing gear atoptimum points.RWhile pulling away, the differential locksare engaged.

Off-road driving systems

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axle dyna-mometer. Before you operate the vehicleon such a dynamometer, please consult a

Driving systems 249

Drivingandparking

Z

qualified workshop. You could otherwisedamage the drive train or the brake system.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP® and4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due to insuffi-cient grip.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 191).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Important safety notesDSR assists you when driving downhill. Itkeeps the speed of travel at the speed set onthe on-board computer. The steeper thedownhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flatstretches of road or on an uphill gradient, theDSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.DSR controls the set speed when it is activeand the automatic transmission is in the D, Ror N position. By accelerating or braking, youcan always drive at a higher or a lower speedthan that set on the on-board computer.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 191).If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canneither reduce the risk of accident nor over-ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic condi-tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.You are always responsible for keeping con-trol of the vehicle and for assessing whetherthe downhill gradient can be managed. DSRmay not always be able to keep to the setspeed, depending on road surface and tireconditions. Select a set speed suitable for the

prevailing conditions and when necessary,apply the brakes manually.

G WARNINGIf the speed driven and the set speed deviateand you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-face, the wheelsmay lose traction. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Before switching DSR on, please take intoconsideration the road surface and the differ-ence between driving speed and the setspeed.

Activating DSRG WARNINGIf you drive faster than the set speed and acti-vate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on down-hill gradients. If you do not know the setspeed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed beforeactivating DSR. If you do not know what thestored set speed is, store the desired setspeed again.

Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: DSR button; DSR indicator lampX Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.Theà DSR symbol appears in the mul-tifunction display.

You can only activate DSR when driving atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

250 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If the current vehicle speed is too high, theà DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display with the Max. speed 25 mphMax. speed 25 mphmessage (Canada: 40 km/h40 km/h).i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on-road program is activated. Theà DSRsymbol and the Not in Drive ProgramNot in Drive ProgramSPORTSPORT message then appears in the multi-function display.

Deactivating DSRX Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.Theà DSR symbol appears in the mul-tifunction display with the OffOff message.

DSR switches off automatically if you drivefaster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). Theà DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display with the OffOffmessage. The statusindicator in the multifunction display goesout. You also hear a warning. On vehicles withthe ON&OFFROAD package, if you select adifferent on-road/off-road program, DSR isalso deactivated.

Changing the set speed

X To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre-ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control lever up:

for a higher set speed or down; for alower set speed.The set speed appears in the multifunctiondisplay with theÃDSR symbol. It is alsodisplayed in status indicator=.

When DSR is activated, you can change theset speed to a value between 1 mph and11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and18 km/h).

i The DSR set speed is always changed in1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h incre-ments). This is regardless of whether youpress the cruise control lever to or beyondthe pressure point.

Off-road programs (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package)

General notesThe off-road programs assist you in drivingoff-road. The engine's performance charac-teristics and the gearshifting characteristicsof the automatic transmission are adapted forthis purpose. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programsespecially adapted to off-road driving are acti-vated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable forthe terrain is selected, i.e. the acceleratorpedal must be depressed further to acceler-ate.Do not use the off-road programs on roadsthat are snow-covered or icy or if you havemounted snow chains on your vehicle.For information on driving off-road, see(Y page 191).The following program messages are shownin the multifunction display until the applica-ble vehicle level is set. Up to off-road level 2,you can hide the programmessages using the% or thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

Driving systems 251

Drivingandparking

Z

Off-road program 1

X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.Off-road indicator= appears in the multi-function display.Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+30 mm)above the vehicle's "highway" level.

Off-road program 1 switches to the AUTOprogram if you drive faster than 70 mph(110 km/h).Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-roadterrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces ortracks. The engine's torque is restricted to alimited degree and the drive wheels can spin.The spinning wheels produce a cutting effectfor better traction.You can only activate off-road program 1when driving at speeds of 60mph (100 km/h)or below. The Drive Program OFFROAD 1Drive Program OFFROAD 1Max.Max. 6060 mph (mph (100100 km/h)km/h)message appearsin the multifunction display.

Off-road program 2

X Selector wheel:: engaged: briefly pressselector wheel:.Selector wheel: extends.

X To select: turn selector wheel: until indi-cator lamp; comes on.Off-road indicator= appears in the multi-function display.ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in (+60mm)above the vehicle's "highway" level.RDSR is switched on.RThe differential lock is closed.

Off-road program 2 automatically switches tooff-road program 1 if you drive faster than30 mph (45 km/h).Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain,e.g. for steep and/or rough terrain or drivingon rocky terrain.

i Your vehicle has an automatically activa-ted differential lock for the transfer case. Itcontrols the balance between the front andrear axles.

252 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The differential lock improves the vehicle'straction. 4ETS (Y page 73) controls the bal-ance between both wheels on an axle.

You can only activate off-road program 2when driving at speeds of 25 mph (40 km/h)or below.

LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD package)

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear ona slippery road surface, the wheels could losetraction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gearwhen driving on slippery road surfaces.

G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Donot turn off the enginewhile changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmissionto another position.

General notes

: LOW RANGE off-road gear button; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp

HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on-road driving conditions

LOW RANGE Off-road position for driv-ing off-road and fordingThe transmission ratiobetween the engine andwheels is only approx-imately one third of that inthe HIGH RANGE roadposition. Drive torque isthus proportionatelyhigher.Do not use LOW RANGE:Ron slippery road surfa-ces, e.g. in the case ofslushRon snow or ice-coveredroadsRif you have mountedsnow chains to yourvehicle

The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you indriving off-road and when fording. When LOWRANGE is engaged, the engine’s performancecharacteristics and the gearshifting charac-teristics of the automatic transmission areadapted for this purpose.Further information about "Driving off-road"(Y page 191). You will find information aboutdriving safety systems in conjunction with

Driving systems 253

Drivingandparking

Z

LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section(Y page 67).

From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGHRANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below40 km/h

X Press LOW RANGE button:.Indicator lamp; flashes.When the gear change is complete, indica-tor lamp; lights up. LOW RANGE indica-tor appears in themultifunction display andin the status indicator.While indicator lamp; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button: again.

i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if theSPORT on-road program is activated. TheLOW RANGE Not in Drive ProgramLOW RANGE Not in Drive ProgramSPORTSPORT message then appears in the multi-function display.

From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGHRANGE if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position NRyou are driving at a speed below70 km/h

X Press LOW RANGE button:.Indicator lamp; flashes.When the gear change is complete, indica-tor lamp; goes out. In the multifunctiondisplay, the LOW RANGE OffLOW RANGE Off messageappears and status indicator= goes out.While indicator lamp; is flashing, you cancancel the gear change by pressing LOWRANGE button: again.

254 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Messages in the multifunction displayIf a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed inthe multifunction display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

LOW RANGE Max.LOW RANGE Max.Speed 40 km/hSpeed 40 km/h

You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the indi-cator lamp on the button in the center console blinks.X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOWLOW RANGERANGE ShiftShift totoPosition N BrieflyPosition N Briefly

The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below40 km/h.X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change proc-ess.

LOWLOW RANGERANGE ShiftingShiftingCanceled PleaseCanceled PleaseReactivateReactivate

The gear change process was not carried out.X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry outthe gear change process again.

LOW RANGE StopLOW RANGE StopApplyApply ParkingParking BrakeBrake

Awarning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not beencompleted. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is noconnection between the engine and the drive wheels.

! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage thevehicle's drive train.

X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic condi-tions when doing this.

X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 184).X Carry out the gear change process again.If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOWLOW RANGERANGEStop Apply Parking BrakeStop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMANDdisplay (vehicles with the ON&OFF-ROAD package)

You can display some driving systems, drivingprograms and additional information in theCOMAND display.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that COMAND is activated, seethe separate COMAND operating instruc-tions.

X Press function button:.The corresponding displays appear in theCOMAND display:Rlevel controlRsteering angleRvehicle's angle of inclination

Driving systems 255

Drivingandparking

Z

Ruphill or downhill gradient in percentageRon-road/off-road program selectedRcondition of the differential lock for thetransfer caseRthe LOWRANGE off-road gear is selectedRcondition of the LOW RANGE off-roadgearRthe on-road trailer program is selected

Towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGInstalling an unsuitable ball coupling mayresult in overloading of the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle. This applies especially if theball coupling in question is longer or angleddifferently. This could seriously impair thedriving characteristics and the trailer cancome loose. There is a risk of an accident.You should only ever install a ball couplingthat has the permissible dimensions and thatis designed to meet your trailer-towingrequirements. Do not modify the ball couplingor the trailer tow hitch.

You will find the values approved by the man-ufacturer on the vehicle identification platesand those for the towing vehicle under "Tech-nical data" (Y page 460).

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if adetachable trailer coupling is used.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found:Rin the vehicle documentsRon the identification plates for the trailertow hitch and the trailerRon the vehicle identification plateIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.

256 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradi-ent-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handling characteris-tics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weather con-ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-tion.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribed max-imum speed for vehicle/trailer combina-tions in the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita-ble for installing detachable trailer cou-plings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings orother detachable trailer couplings on thebumpers of your vehicle.RIf you no longer need the ball coupling,remove it from the ball coupling recess.This will reduce the risk of damage to theball coupling.

i When towing a trailer, set the tire pres-sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle

for a maximum load; see the tire pressuretable in the fuel filler flap (Y page 421).

Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK-TRONIC (Y page 217) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 237) are only available with limita-tions, or not at all.

i On vehicles without level control, theheight of the ball coupling will alter accord-ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If nec-essary, use a trailer with a height-adjusta-ble drawbar.

You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 459).

Driving tips

i Observe the information on ESP® trailerstabilization (Y page 74) and on pullingaway with a trailer (Y page 161).

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what the max-imum permissible speed is. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed in the rel-evant country.For certainMercedes-Benz vehicles, themax-imum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. See "Technical data" tofind out whether this applies to your vehicle(Y page 460). If you utilize any of the addedmaximum rear axle loadwhen towing a trailer,the vehicle/trailer combination may notexceed a maximum speed of 60 mph(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the oper-ating permit. This also applies in countries inwhich the permissible maximum speed forvehicle/trailer combinations is above 60mph(100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into alower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients.

Towing a trailer 257

Drivingandparking

Z

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required to main-tain the speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-cle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brakegently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbingcapabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engineand, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases withincreasing altitude.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly installedand secured, it can come loose during thejourney and endanger other road users. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and the

corresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed and securedcorrectly the trailer may come loose. There isa risk of an accident.Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-bed in the ball coupling installation instruc-tions. Make sure that the ball coupling isinstalled and secured correctly before everyjourney.

Cover capX Pull protective cap: in the direction of thearrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

X Place protective cap: in the ball couplingrecess.

258 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Ball coupling recess

Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recessX Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ballcoupling recess; in the direction of thearrow until the holes in ball coupling= arein line with the holes in ball couplingrecess?.

BoltX Slide boltA into the hole in the ball cou-pling recess and the ball coupling to thestop.

Bolt and spring cotterX Secure the bolt using spring cotterB.

Correctly installed and secured ball couplingX Check the ball coupling, bolt and springcotter for correct installation.

If the ball coupling cannot be correctly moun-ted, remove the ball coupling. Under thesecircumstances, the ball coupling must not beused for trailer towing.If the ball coupling cannot be locked and thekey cannot be removed, remove the ball cou-pling and clean it. If the ball coupling can stillnot be installed (locked) after it has beencleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailertow hitch must then not be used to tow atrailer, as safe operation cannot be guaran-teed.Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Coupling up a trailer! Do not connect the trailer's brake system(if featured) to the hydraulic brake system

Towing a trailer 259

Drivingandparking

Z

of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equip-ped with an anti-lock brake system. Doingso will result in a loss of function of thebrake systems of both the vehicle and thetrailer.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:select highway level.

X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO orCOMF.

X Switch off the engine.X Close all doors and the tailgate.X Couple up the trailer.X Establish all electrical connections.X Check that the trailer lighting system isworking.

i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:with a trailer attached, the vehicle willalways remain at highway level. When cou-pling up a trailer, please observe the fol-lowing:RUnless highway level has been set man-ually, the vehicle is automatically low-ered to highway level. This is the case if aspeed of 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached.RHigh-speed level is not available.These restrictions apply to all accessoriespowered through a connection to the trailerpower socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicyclecarrier.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most U.S. states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:RSafety chains between the towing vehicleand the trailer. The chains should be cross-woundunder the trailer drawbar. Theymustbe fastened to the vehicle's trailer cou-pling, not to the bumper or the axle.

Leave enough play in the chains to maketight cornering possible.RA separate brake system for certain typesof trailer.RA safety switch for braked trailers. Checkthe specific legal requirements applicableto your state.If the trailer detaches from the towing vehi-cle, the safety switch applies the trailer'sbrakes.

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirements con-cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speedrestrictions. Make sure that your car/trailercombination complies with the local regula-tions:Rin your place of residenceRin the location to which you are drivingThe police and local authorities can providereliable information.Observe the following when towing a trailer:RTo gain driving experience and to becomeaccustomed to the new handling charac-teristics, you should practice the followingin a traffic-free location:- cornering- stopping- backing upRBefore driving, check:

- trailer tow hitch- safety switch for braked trailers- safety chains- electrical connections- lights- wheelsRAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer has electronically controlledbrakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually

260 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

using the brake controller and checkwhether the brakes function correctly.RSecure any objects on the trailer to preventthe cargo from slipping when the vehicle isin motion.RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at reg-ular intervals that the load is firmly secured.If the trailer is equipped with trailer lightsand brakes, check the trailer to ensure thatthese are working.RBear in mind that the handling will be lessstable when towing a trailer thanwhen driv-ing without one. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,accelerates more slowly, has a decreasedgradient climbing capability and a longerbraking distance.It is more susceptible to side winds andrequires more careful steering.RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, butinstead depress the brake pedal moder-ately at first so that the trailer can activateits brakes. Then increase the pressure onthe brake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedlyshifts between gears on uphill or downhillgradients, shift to a lower gear using theleft-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.A lower gear and lower speed reduce therisk of engine failure.RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gearto utilize the engine's braking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, ifinstalled, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases dra-matically while the air-conditioning systemis switched on, switch off the air-condition-ing system.Coolant heat can also be dissipated byopening the windows and switching the

ventilation blower and the interior temper-ature to the highest level.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attentionto the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.Due to the length of the vehicle/trailercombination, you require additional roadspace in relation to the vehicle you areovertaking before you can change back tothe original lane.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-nect the trailer cable. This could result in yourlimbs or those of other people that arebetween the vehicle body and tires or under-neath the vehicle being trapped. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the immediatevicinity of the wheel housings or under thevehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by the rebound-ing of the overrun brake.

X Make sure that the automatic transmissionis set to position P.

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.X Start the engine.X Close all doors and the tailgate.X Apply the trailer's parking brake.

Towing a trailer 261

Drivingandparking

Z

X Detach the trailer cable and decouple thetrailer.

X Switch off the engine.

Permissible trailer loads and drawbarloads

Weight specifications

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight ratingThe gross trailer weight is calculated by add-ing the weight of the trailer to the weight ofthe load and equipment on the trailer.You will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 459).

Permissible noseweightYou will find installing dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 459).

Loading a trailerRWhen loading the trailer, make sure thatneither the permissible gross weight of thetrailer nor the gross vehicle weight isexceeded. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.You can find the maximum permissible val-ues on the type plates of your vehicle andthe trailer. When calculating how muchweight the vehicle and trailer may carry,pay attention to the respective lowest val-ues.RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball couplingmust be added to the rear axle load to avoidexceeding the permissible gross axleweight. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailerload where the trailer drawbar noseweight

accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's per-missible gross weight.

i The weight of additional accessories, pas-sengers, and cargo reduces the permissi-ble trailer load and drawbar load for yourvehicle.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRTo check that the weights of the towingvehicle and the trailer comply with themax-imumpermissible values, have the vehicle/trailer combination (including the driver,passengers, and cargo with a fully ladentrailer) weighed on a calibrated weigh-bridge.RCheck the gross axle weight rating of thefront and rear axles, the gross weight of thetrailer and trailer drawbar load.

Removing the ball couplingX Remove the spring cotter.X Remove the bolt from the ball couplingrecess.

X Remove the ball coupling from the ball cou-pling recess.

X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.X Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot bethrown around.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 335).Information on cleaning and care of the trailertow hitch can be found at (Y page 376).

Storing the ball coupling

G WARNINGDo not carry the ball coupling in the vehicleinterior if it is not secured.Otherwise, you and others could be injured bythe ball coupling being thrown around if you:

262 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accident

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a max-imum power consumption of 240 W to thepermanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factorywith a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 4.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

Towing a trailer 263

Drivingandparking

Z

264

Useful information ............................ 266Important safety notes .................... 266Displays and operation .................... 266Menus and submenus ...................... 269Display messages ............................. 284Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 318

265

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at all

times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 35).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 35).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

266 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 35).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 268).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 195):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 198):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separate oper-ating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Time; Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 277)= Text field? Menu bar

268 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

A Drive program (Y page 168)B Transmission position (Y page 168)X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audio sys-tem or COMAND; see the separate operat-ing instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation, when

shifting manually (Y page 173)XjY Active Parking Assist

(Y page 220)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 195)LOWLOWRANGERANGE

LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 253)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 126)

¤ ECO start/stop function(Y page 162)

ë HOLD function (Y page 210)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 267).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 269)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 271)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 272)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 273)

RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 275)RServServ menu (Y page 276)RSettSett menu (settings) (Y page 277)RON&OFFROADON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 281)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 281)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select From StartFrom Startor From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu are

Menus and submenus 269

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

calculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 270).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECO display is not available for AMG vehi-cles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Select ECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY with9 or:.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 187).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theapproximate range and the current fuelconsumption (not for AMG vehicles).

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 173); Digital speedometerGearshift recommendation: is not given onAMG vehicles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

270 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.For more information, see the separate oper-ating instructions.X Switch on the audio system with Becker®MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Menus and submenus 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction

? Lanes not recommendedA Recommended laneB Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction=: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes ofdirection without changing lane.Lane not recommended?: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Recommended laneA: in this lane you willonly be able to complete the next change ofdirection without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new route.ROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along with sta-tion; if this has been stored.

X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separate oper-ating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

272 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND Online and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode, see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until the desired track hasbeen reached:.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display

X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene: hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

Menus and submenus 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call

If someone calls you when you are in the TelTelmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not in theTelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

274 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have the fol-lowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 275)RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-ing function (Y page 275)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 276)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 276)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 276)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 276)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the DIS-TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis-tance graphic.

The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 233)RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 205)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 239) or ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 244)RDistance warning function (Y page 70)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)RDSR (Y page 250)ROff-road program (vehicles with theON&OFFROAD package) (Y page 251)

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select DistanceDistanceWarningWarning.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When the distance warning function isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheæ symbol in the multifunction dis-play.

Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 70).

Menus and submenus 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®Brake

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbolin the multifunction display.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 75).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 233).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 241).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select Lane Keep‐Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, the multifunc-tion display shows the lane markings asbright lines in the assistance graphic.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 239).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 244).

Maintenance menu

In the ServServ menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 284)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 408)

276 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 408)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 371)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Sett.Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 277)RChanging the light settings (Y page 277)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 279)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 279)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 281)

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RDigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation messages in the NaviNavi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display:Permanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or Speedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph]/Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is highlighted in km/h or inmph conversely to your speedometer.

Light submenu

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

Menus and submenus 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightsRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunction dis-play are shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 120).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-.Amb. Light +/-. function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from OffOff to Level 5Level 5(bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmbient Light ColorAmbient Light Color function.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set thecolor to SOLARSOLAR, NEUTRALNEUTRAL or POLARPOLAR.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Sur‐Sur‐round Lightinground Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Light‐Surround Light‐inging function and the light switch is set toÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 120).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you closeall the doors and the tailgate, the exteriorlighting goes off after 5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:

278 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

RParking lampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.If the InteriorInterior LightingLighting DelayDelay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle submenu

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.When the AutomaticAutomatic DoorDoor LockLock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 88).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198)RBAS PLUS (Y page 69)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 237)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 241)

Convenience submenu

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicle

Menus and submenus 279

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

occupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit:Easy Entry/Exit: function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function is activa-ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 113).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.If the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function is activa-ted, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 49).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 116).When you activate the Auto.Auto. MirrorMirror Fold‐Fold‐inging function, the exterior mirrors are foldedinwhen the vehicle is locked. If you unlock thevehicle and then open a door, the exteriormirrors fold out again.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Mirror FoldingMirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or outIf you have switched the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding on and you fold the exterior mirrorsin using button: , they will not fold outautomatically (Y page 115).You can then only fold out the exteriormirrorsusing button:.

280 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you select YesYes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

ON&OFFROAD menu

Example: multifunction displayX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ON&OFFROADON&OFFROAD menu.

You can set the current settings to appear inthe ON&OFFROADON&OFFROAD menu:ROn-road program (Y page 247)ROff-road program (Y page 251)

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator UPUP = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP = fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), oil temperature? is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.If the transmission fluid temperature is below122‡ (50†), oil temperatureB is shown inblue. Avoid driving at full engine output duringthis time.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF)= Suspension tuning (COMFORTCOMFORT/SPORTSPORT/

SPORT+SPORT+)

Menus and submenus 281

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and thesuspension tuning.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

282 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Menus and submenus 283

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 210)RParking (Y page 182)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

284 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hillstart assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavail-able.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assistand ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to amalfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

Display messages 285

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

286 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-lization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 287

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 184).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 184).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow!warning lamp and the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 184).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

288 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 424).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 184).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 289

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ParkingParking BrakeBrake Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasetion to Releasethe Parking Brakethe Parking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

290 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Brake WearBrake Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace systemare malfunctioning.Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAIDsystem are malfunctioning.X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 291

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐Functions Cur‐rentlyrently LimitedLimited SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: AdaptiveBrake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the bumpers (Y page 375).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 73).

292 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐Functions Cur‐rentlyrently LimitedLimited SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper(Y page 375).

X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 73).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: AdaptiveBrake Assist is faulty. The distancewarning functionmay also havefailed.Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package:PRE‑SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warningfunction may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6RestraintRestraint Sys.Sys. Mal‐Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

The restraint system is faulty.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 44).

Display messages 293

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center Mal‐Rear Center Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

294 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated thefront-passenger air bag (Y page 53).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 295

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Clas-sification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag(Y page 53).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

296 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsIf these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐Check Left Corner‐ing Lighting Light or CheckCheckRight CorneringRight CorneringLightLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck TrailerTrailer LeftLeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck TrailerCheck TrailerRight Turn SignalRight Turn Signal

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 297

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

298 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 129).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.orThe rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive Light Sys‐Active Light Sys‐tem Inoperativetem Inoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.X Check the fuses (Y page 396).X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe thewarning notes.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 299

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-played.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 369).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

300 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

#SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 301

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Observe the instructions in the display message# SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 367).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 368).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 367).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 368).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

302 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Ultra Low-sulfurUltra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel OnlyDiesel Fuel Only

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFURHIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM).

¸Replace Air FilterReplace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel FilterCheck Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ØCheckCheck AdditiveAdditive SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The DEF tank is almost empty.X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop (Y page 180).

ØRemaining Starts:Remaining Starts:1616

The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine afurther 16 times.X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop (Y page 180).

i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added,it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEFtank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (Y page 180).

Display messages 303

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÁDrive More SlowlyDrive More Slowly

You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:Ryou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.Ryou are towing a trailer.Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle levelagain.RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 206)RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 213)

X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 257).

ÁCompressorCompressor IsIs Cool‐Cool‐inging

You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor firstneeds to cool down because of frequent level changes.X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Allow the compressor to cool down.When the compressor has cooled down, the display messagedisappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selectedlevel.

ÁABC MalfunctionABC Malfunction

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do notexceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

304 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÁMax. Speed 12 mphMax. Speed 12 mph

You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-roadlevel.In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicleicon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle could tip and rollover.There is a risk of an accident.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steeringmovements.

X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reachedoff-road level 2.

ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐TEM malfunctioningTEM malfunctioning

The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐ACTIVE CURVE SYS‐TEM MalfunctionTEM MalfunctionSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The Active Curve System is faulty. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics are severely impaired. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.X Avoid sudden acceleration in tight bends and fast steeringmovements.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ÁRaisingRaising Max.Max. SpeedSpeed12 mph12 mph

The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display mes-sage informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-roadlevel 3.X Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).

gLoweringLowering Max.Max.Speed 12 mphSpeed 12 mph

The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed per-missible for off-road level 3.X Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reachedoff-road level 2.

Display messages 305

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ýDifferent. LockDifferent. LockSys. MalfunctionSys. Malfunction

The differential lock is faulty.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ýDifferent.Different. LockingLockingSys. Cooling DownSys. Cooling DownPlease WaitPlease Wait

The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged.X Drive on carefully.X Allow the differential lock to cool down.The differential lock re-engages as soon as it has cooled down.

LOW RANGE StopLOW RANGE StopApplyApply ParkingParking BrakeBrake

A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neu-tral position. There is no connection between the engine and thedrive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving underany circumstances.

X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGE Malfunc‐LOW RANGE Malfunc‐tion To Park,tion To Park,Apply BrakeApply Brake

LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 182).

X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

LOW RANGE Max.LOW RANGE Max.Speed 25 mphSpeed 25 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max.LOW RANGE Max.Speed 40 mphSpeed 40 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.The gear change is made.

LOWLOW RANGERANGE ShiftShift totoPosition N BrieflyPosition N Briefly

You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmis-sion is not in position N.X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

LOWLOW RANGERANGE ShiftingShiftingCanceled PleaseCanceled PleaseReactivateReactivate

The gearshift process has been canceled.X Repeat the gearshift process.

ÃInoperativeInoperative

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion.X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

306 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 210).

RadarRadar SensorsSensors Deac‐Deac‐tivated See Opera‐tivated See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 279).

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active LaneActive LaneKeepingKeeping AssistAssist Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist Inopera‐Assist Inopera‐tivetive or ActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 307

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-erative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors (Y page 375).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated whiletowing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐Park Assist Can‐celedceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

308 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 220).

ParkPark AssistAssist Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-imately ten minutes (Y page 220).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Fin‐Park Assist Fin‐ishedished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 198).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 198).

Display messages 309

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper(Y page 375).

X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may beinoperative as well.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Sus‐Sus‐pendedpended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 198).

310 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control--- mph--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 195).

Display messages 311

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Soonsure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 383).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 408).

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Then Restartsure Then RestartRun Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 408).

RunRun FlatFlat IndicatorIndicatorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

312 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Please CorrectPlease CorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 408).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 411).

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 383).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 408).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 313

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 383).

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Currentlytor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

Wheel Sensor Miss‐Wheel Sensor Miss‐inging

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperativetor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

314 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Shift to 'P' orShift to 'P' or'N''N' toto StartStart EngineEngine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P beforeyou switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission NotTransmission Notin P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in positionR,N orD.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Display messages 315

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function See Oper‐function See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

No ServiceNo Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 370).

316 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Wiper malfunction‐Wiper malfunction‐inging

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard warningHazard warninglamps malfunction‐lamps malfunction‐inging

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 83).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 secondsand is simply a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

Display messages 317

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemoveRemove 'Start''Start' But‐But‐ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning tone ceases.

318 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 319

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-acteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

320 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLI-SIONPREVENTIONASSIST, theHOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 321

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, and ESP® trailer stabilization, for exam-ple, are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

322 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization,for example, are also not available.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 323

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 73), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 73), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

324 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS andPRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 325

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red electric parkingbrake indicator lampflashes or lights upand/or!

warning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red restraint sys-tem warning lamp is litwhile the engine is run-ning.

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 44).

326 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in thesestates. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry(Y page 180).X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergencyrunning mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 327

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gauge is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec-tive.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

328 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 369).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 329

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 369).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing function warninglamp comes on whilethe vehicle is moving. Awarning tone alsosounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198).Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 75).Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 70).

330 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 383).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 408).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 331

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

332

Useful information ............................ 334Stowage areas .................................. 334Features ............................................. 345

333

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgateis open when the engine is running, particu-larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumescould enter the passenger compartment.There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, installed accessories, vehicle occu-pants and luggage/cargo.The gross load limit and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle mustnever be exceeded. The gross load limit andthe GVWR are specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor (Y page 412).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. The specifications for GVWR andGAWR are on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 412).Observe the notes on loading the vehicle(Y page 412).The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (including occu-pants).RThe cargo compartment is the preferredplace to carry objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo com-partment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.

334 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RHook in the cargo net when loading.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334).

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

i The glove box can be cooled(Y page 153).

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box lockedThe glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.

Partition: for stowing flat objects is locatedin the upper section of the glove box. It can beremoved to increase the stowage space in theglove box.X To remove: pull partition: forwards andout

X To install: insert partition: and push itback until it engages.

Stowage areas 335

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment under the arm-rest

X To open: pull handle: up.The armrest folds out.

In the stowage compartment, there is a stow-age tray.

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, aUSB connection or a Media Interface isinstalled in the stowage compartment.A Media Interface is a universal interfacefor mobile audio equipment, e.g. for aniPod® or MP3 player (see the separateCOMAND Operating Instructions).

i There is a removable stowage tray in thestorage compartment, in which objectssuch as an iPod® can be stored.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the front cen-ter console

X To open: slide cover: forwards.Stowage compartment; appears.

X To close: pull cover: back as far as it willgo.

Stowage compartment in the rear cen-ter console

X To open: briefly press the stowage com-partment marking.The stowage compartment opens.

336 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,there may be open stowage spaces aboveand below the stowage compartment.

Stowage net

G WARNINGVehicles with the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS):If the gross weight of the objects in the stow-age net on the back of the front-passengerseat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), OCS cannotcorrectly assess the occupant's weight cate-gory. The front-passenger front air bag coulddeploy without cause, or may fail to deploy inthe event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never exceed the permissible gross weight of4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects inthe cargo compartment.

Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the back of thedriver's and the front-passenger seat.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 335).

Through-loading facility in the rearIf objects or loads are not securedwhen beingtransported in the through-loading facility,they could slip or be thrown around andthereby hit vehicle occupants.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 335).

The through-loading facility is opened fromthe cargo compartment.X Release the seat backrests in the secondrow of seats and tilt them in the cargo/loadposition (Y page 108).

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 106).

X Slide release catch: to the left and swingflap; to the left until it is lying on the rearside of the rear bench seat.

X Push cover= forward until it is lying on therear seat armrest.

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-

Stowage areas 337

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Fold the seat cushion upwards beforefolding the rear bench seat forward. Other-wise, the backrests may be damaged.When the backrest is folded forwards, thefront seats should not be moved to theirrearmost position. Otherwise, the frontseats and the rear bench seat could bedamaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334).The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded forwards separately toincrease the cargo compartment capacity.

Folding the rear bench seat forwards

! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, takecare when folding it down. Make sure thatthe head restraints are pushed all the wayin so that the backrests and seat cushionsare not damaged.

i If the driver's or front-passenger seat isset for a larger person, it may not be pos-sible to fold the rear bench seat forwards.In this case, move the front seats as farforward as possible.

X Move the head restraints to the lowestposition (Y page 108).

X Fold seat cushion: upwards.

X Pull release handle; upwards in the direc-tion of the arrow until the backrest is fullyreleased.

X Fold the backrest forwards until it reachesthe cargo compartment position.

X Guide seat belts; under respectiveclips:.

338 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Folding the rear bench seat back

X Fold seat backrest; back until it engages.Make sure not to trap the seat belt whiledoing so.

X Swing seat cushion: back.X Pull up and adjust the head restraints ifnecessary (Y page 108).

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesG WARNINGThe Top Tether anchorages cannot secure aload. If you secure a load with the Top Tetheranchorages, the Top Tether anchorages couldbe pulled out during braking, abrupt changesin direction or in the event of an accident. Theload could slip, tip over or be flung around andthereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a riskof injury.Only use the cargo tie down rings when secur-ing a load.

Observe the following notes on securingloads:RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.

RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Cargo compartment

There are four cargo tie-down rings: in thecargo compartment.Before using the cargo tie-down rings on thefront right-hand side of the cargo compart-ment, the stowage net must be pushed down.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear amaximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

Stowage areas 339

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartmenton the left-hand side.X Press bag hook marking:.X Turn bag hook: until it engages.

Securing hooks

There is one securing hook: on each side ofthe cargo compartment.Only secure lightweight luggage items on thesecuring hooks (maximum 9 lbs (4 kg)).

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo com-partment higher than the lower edge of theside windows. Do not place heavy objectson top of the cargo compartment cover.

A cargo compartment cover or a combinedcargo cover and net (cargo compartmentcover with cargo net) is installed, dependingon equipment, behind the rear bench seatbackrest.

Extending/retracting the cargo com-partment cover

X To extend: pull the cargo compartmentcover back by grab handle: and clip it intoretainers; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartmentcover from left-hand and right-hand retain-ers;.

X Guide cargo compartment cover forwardsby grab handle: until it is completely rol-led up.

340 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Removing/installing the cargo com-partment cover (without integratedcargo net)

X To remove: make sure that cargo com-partment cover: is rolled up.

X Push end cap= of cargo compartmentcover: in the direction of the arrow on theright or left-hand side.

X Push cargo compartment cover: intoopposite anchorage;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover:.X To install: if installed, remove the protec-tive caps from the side panels of the seatrow in which the cargo compartment coveris to be installed. Use a suitable objecthere, e.g. a coin.

X Install the protective caps to the side pan-els of the other seat row.

X Place cargo compartment cover: intoanchorage; on the right or left-hand side.

X Push in opposite end cap= of cargo com-partment cover: in the direction of thearrow and insert cargo compartmentcover: into opposite anchorage;.

Removing/installing the combinedcargo cover and net (cargo compart-ment cover with integrated cargo net)

You can install and remove the combinedcargo cover and net from the cargo compart-ment.X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargocompartment cover are rolled up.

X To remove: press button;.X Swing the combined cargo cover and net inthe direction of the arrow.

X First, detach the combined cargo cover andnet from left-hand catch: and thenremove it from right-hand fixture=.

X To install: push the combined cargo coverand net up to the stop into right-hand fix-ture=.

X Place the combined cargo cover and netinto the left-hand fixture and push it intocatch: until the combined cargo coverand net engages audibly.

X Make sure that red lock status indicator?is no longer visible. The combined cargo

Stowage areas 341

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

cover and net will otherwise not be lockedin place.

Cargo net in combined cargo coverand net

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. There isan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.

Attaching the cargo net

X Pull the cargo net up by tab: and hook itinto eyelets; using both hands.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Components and storageThe EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows youto use your cargo compartment for a varietyof purposes. The accessory parts are locatedunder the cargo compartment floor.X Open the trunk floor (Y page 344).

EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts: Bag containing the brackets and luggage

holder; Telescopic rod

342 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Inserting the brackets into the loadingrail

X Insert bracket: into the center of loadingrail?.

X Press release button; and pushbracket: into the desired position in load-ing rail?.

X Let go of release button;.X Press locking button=.Bracket: is locked in loading rail?.

X If necessary, fold cargo tie-down ringAupwards.

Luggage holder

! Only use the luggage holder to securecargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs(7 kg) andwith dimensions that the luggageholder can safely and securely contain.

The luggage holder can be used to securelight loads against the side wall of the cargocompartment to prevent them from movingaround.

X To install: insert two bracketsA into theleft or right loading rail (Y page 342).

X Press release button: of the luggageholder and pull the strap out slightly.

X Insert luggage holder; into bracketsAand, while doing so, press release button= and push the luggage holder downwardsuntil it engages.

X Press release button: of the luggageholder and pull the strap out in the directionof the arrow.

X Place the load between the strap and thecargo compartment side wall.

X Using one hand, press locking button: ofthe luggage holder.

X With your other hand, let the strap go slowlyuntil the load is secured.

X Make sure that locking button? on brack-etsA is pressed.This keeps bracketsA in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button= onrespective bracketA and remove luggageholder; by pulling upwards and out.

Telescopic rod

The telescopic rod can be used to secure theload against the rear seats to prevent it frommoving around.X To install: insert one bracket; into boththe left and the right loading rails and slideit to the desired position (Y page 342).

X Insert telescopic rod: into brackets;and, while doing so, press release but-

Stowage areas 343

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

ton? and push the rod downwards until itengages.

X Make sure that locking button= on brack-ets; is pressed.This keeps brackets; in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button? onrespective bracket; and remove tele-scopic rod: by pulling it upwards and out.

Stowage well under the cargo com-partment floor

G WARNINGIf you drivewhen the cargo compartment flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the cargo compartment floorbefore a journey.

A removable insert under the cargo compart-ment floor contains the parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kit. The tire-change toolkit is stored beneath this insert.X To open: holding the ribbing, press han-dle: downwards;.Handle: folds up.

X Swing the cargo compartment floorupwards using handle: until it restsagainst the cargo compartment cover.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of thecargo compartment floor in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Attach hook= to the cargo compart-ment's upper seal?.

X To close: detach hook= from the cargocompartment's upper seal?.

X Fasten hook= to the bracket on theunderside of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.X Press the cargo compartment floordown; until it engages.

i To remove the cargo compartment floor,undo the press studs below the cargo com-partment floor. When you re-install thecargo compartment floor, fasten it with thepress studs.

344 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-led you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof fullyRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the tailgate fully

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).

Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails:. Indoing so, observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 334).

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the tem-perature-controlled cup holder (Y page 346).Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not berecognized.The stowage compartments in the doors pro-vide space for bottles with a capacity of up to34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).The bottles are not secured or prevented fromtipping over. Therefore, do not place any opendrink containers in the stowage compart-ments.

Features 345

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holder; CoverX To open: slide cover; to its foremostposition.

X To close: pull cover; back as far as it willgo.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber matfor cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarmwater only.

Temperature-controlled cup holder inthe front-compartment center console

: Cup holder; Residual heat indicator lamp= SwitchThe temperature-controlled cup holder canbe used to keep cold drinks cool and warmdrinks warm.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X To switch on the cooling function: pressand hold button= until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button= until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton= until the indicator lamp on thebutton goes out.

When the heating function is used, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. Once a cer-tain temperature is reached, residual heatindicator lamp; lights up. This means thatthe metal insert of the cup holder is hot. Forthis reason, you must not reach into the cupholder metal insert.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.Cup holder: is located in the rear seatarmrest.

346 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor; to thewindshield.

Roller sunblinds on the rear side win-dows! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic roller mech-anism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at theback of the window.

Features 347

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The roller sunblind can be hooked back intoplace should it pop out from the top of theguide rail.X Tilt pull-out profile: as illustrated.X Slip guide bush; into open area of guiderail=.

X Straighten up pull-out profile: again.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The holder under the ashtray is not heatresistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in theashtray, make sure that the ashtray is prop-erly engaged. Otherwise, the holder couldbe damaged.

X To open: slide cover: to its foremostposition.

X Fold cover= of the insert upwards.X To remove the insert: push insert= tothe left?.Insert= slides out slightly to the right.

X Lift insert= up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: place insert=into the holder and press it down on theright until it engages.

X To close: pull cover: back as far as it willgo.

Rear-compartment ashtray

! Close the ashtray when it is not in use andbefore you fold the rear seats forward. Youcan otherwise damage the ashtray.

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: push into recess=from the right.Ashtray insert: slides out slightly to theright.

X Lift insert: up and out.X To re-install the insert: place insert:into the holder and press down on the rightuntil it engages.

Vehicles without a Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem have an ashtray in the center consolein the rear compartment.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.

348 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

! The cigarette lighter in the center consolein the front compartment is not intendedfor operating the tire inflation compressor.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X To open: slide cover: to its foremostposition.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: pull cover: back as far as it willgo.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

With the exception of the socket in the frontcenter console, all sockets can be used foraccessories with a maximum current draw of240 W (20 A). The socket in the front centerconsole can be used for accessories with amaximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

! The socket is not suitable for operatingthe tire inflation compressor.

X To open: slide cover: to its foremostposition.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: pull cover: back as far as it willgo.

Features 349

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Lift up the cover of socket:.Vehicles with the Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem have two sockets in the center con-sole in the rear compartment.

Socket in the cargo compartment

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notes115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronic devi-ces can be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,should not consumemore than amaximumof150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect hasa suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a per-missible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartmentand the cargo compartment are opera-tional.

350 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To turn off:disconnect the plug from115Vpower socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 351

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 389).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-oncurrent. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and passwordwill be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

352 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audio sys-tem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative or Service Not ActivatedService Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To reg-ister, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Features 353

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

General notesAnemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

354 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Callmessage. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter can ascertain the nature of the prob-lem (Y page 359).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-tance call button: is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐nectingnecting CallCallmessage. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Features 355

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio sys-tem or on COMAND for ending a telephonecall

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

356 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phone net-work is available and data transfer is pos-sible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and a navi-gation system. Additionally, anmbrace ser-vice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter a desti-nation address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.

i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe COMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than one destina-tion address, each individual destinationmust be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles with mbrace and activated mbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Features 357

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe correspondingmobile phone network isaccessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote locking feature can beused when you have forgotten to lock thevehicle and you are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote locking

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be lockedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

358 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-matically notified.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis (Vehicle Health Check), the CustomerAssistance center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance center. The customerservice representative can use the receiveddata to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐tance Connectedtance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis can be started, the Request forRequest forvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis?vehicle diagnosis? message appears inthe display.X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 157).

X When the PleasePlease followfollow thethe instruc‐instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.your vehicle to a safe position.message appears, follow the customer ser-vice representative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceled com-pletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interrupted dur‐connection may be//interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at your work-shop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receive informa-tion on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 30).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 26).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insert

Features 359

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

the card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.DoDo youyou wantwant toto startstart routeroute guidance?guidance?message in the COMANDdisplay. The route issaved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in the sep-arate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remote

360 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

control. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programing a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programing.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 28).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programing buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 361).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programing mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ing mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programed for thefirst time. If the selected button has alreadybeen programed, indicator lamp: willonly light up yellow after ten seconds haveelapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

Features 361

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 361).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programing button on thedoor drive control panel. The programing but-ton may be positioned at different locationsdepending on the manufacturer. It is usuallylocated on the door drive unit on the garageceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-graming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programing button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openeruntil the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programing the remote controlCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprograming. Comparable with Canadian law,someU.S. garage door openers also feature a"break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programing thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programing steps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.

362 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-viewmirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote con-trolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.RWhen programing, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thebutton which you are programing. Try vari-ous angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprograming steps with this remote control.

Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogramed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow. Press but-ton;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Features 363

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

Floormat on the driver's side (example)X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:slide the respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the respective seat for-wards.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents thevehicle interior from becoming too hot. It alsoblocks radio waves up into the gigahertzrange.To enable operation of radio-controlled equip-ment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas onthe windshield are permeable to radiowaves:. In these areas, you can installradio-controlled systems.These areas can best be seen from outsidethe vehicle by observing the light reflected offthe windshield.

364 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 366Engine compartment ........................ 366ASSYST PLUS .................................... 370Care .................................................... 371

365

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

366 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

RadiatorVehicles with a diesel engine: do not coverthe radiator, for examplewith awinter front orbug cover. The readings of the on-board-diag-nostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.Some of these readings are required by lawand must be accurate at all times.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 367

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engineX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

368 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 367).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 452).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.

Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 158).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge inthe multifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

Engine compartment 369

Maintenance

andcare

Z

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 453).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highly flam-mable. If it comes into contact with hot enginecomponents or the exhaust system it couldignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: washer fluid reservoir

Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 316).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 454).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 367).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods of

370 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

time during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the%orabutton on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval display

after the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Care 371

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmissionis in transmission positionN, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor or front-passenger door when theengine is switched off. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission selects parkposition P automatically and locks thewheels. You can prevent this by shiftingthe automatic transmission to N before-hand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position Pautomatically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:

372 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlets.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Care 373

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

374 CareMaintenance

andcare

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between

Care 375

Maintenance

andcare

Z

the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with apower washer. Do not use solvents.

376 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if itbecomes dirty or corroded.X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,e.g. with a wire brush.

X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or abrush.

X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-pling:.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

i You can also have the maintenance workon the ball coupling and the trailer towhitchcarried out by a qualified specialist work-shop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

! Never clean the camera lens.When clean-ing the field of vision of the driving systems,make sure that you do not spray glasscleaner on the camera lens. If the cameralens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield infront of camera;.

Care 377

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and

can lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:

378 CareMaintenance

andcare

Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solution contain-ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq-uid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 379

Maintenance

andcare

Z

380

Useful information ............................ 382Where will I find...? ........................... 382Flat tire .............................................. 383Battery (vehicle) ................................ 387Jump-starting .................................... 391Towing and tow-starting .................. 393Fuses .................................................. 396

381

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-age well under the cargo compartment floor.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tools arerequired to perform awheel change on yourvehicle, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Vehicle tool kit (example): Lug wrench; Jack= Alignment bolt? Tire inflation compressorA Tire sealant filler bottleB Folding wheel chockC Towing eyeD Ratchet wrenchUse the TIREFIT kit (Y page 384).

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

Example: vehicles with AIRMATIC and trailer towhitch: Folding wheel chock; Lug wrench= Alignment bolt? Towing eyeA JackB Ratchet wrench

382 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

X Lift the cargo compartment floor up(Y page 344).

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel (Y page 441).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-erties) (Y page 383)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 382)Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certaincountries) (Y page 440)

Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 423).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 182).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:make sure that highway level is selected(Y page 211).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 158).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.X Unload heavy luggage.

i Only operate the tire inflation compressorusing a 12 V socket, even if the ignition isturned off (Y page 349).An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If theon-board voltage is too low, the power tothe sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 417).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 312).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.

Flat tire 383

Breakdow

nassistance

The maximum driving distance is approx-imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle ispartially laden and approximately 18 miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-ure. Make sure that you use the proper sizeand type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not

384 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-

tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 382).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket inyour vehicle.Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 349).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 157).

Flat tire 385

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Press on/off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:(Y page 386).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes:(Y page 386).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed withtire sealant is 50mph (80 km/h). The upperpart of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixedto the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

386 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

E Pressure release buttonF Pressure gaugeX To reduce the tire pressure: press pres-sure release buttonE on the filler hose.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 68) and (Y page 72).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.

Battery (vehicle) 387

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

388 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You

can also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

Battery (vehicle) 389

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case youmay neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a thawed-outbattery may be shorter. The starting charac-teristics can be impaired, particularly at lowtemperatures. Have the thawed-out batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Never charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unitapproved byMercedes-Benz is being used. Anaccessory battery charge unit specially adap-ted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz is available.It permits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for further informa-tion and availability. Charge the battery inaccordance with the separate instructions forthe battery charger.The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 391).Read the battery charger's operating instruc-tions before charging the battery.X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 391).

390 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seekmedical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Other-wise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 391

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). On vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 158). All indicator lampsin the instrument cluster must be off.

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

(Example)

392 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting 393

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recov-ery or towing. Do not use the towing eye forrecovery. this could damage the vehicle. Ifin doubt, have the vehicle recovered usinga crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. Pull the towed vehicle as straightas possible and not at an acute angle.Excessive tractive power could damage thevehicles.

i When towing, it is preferable to use a rigidtowing bar as opposed to a tow rope. A rigidtowing bar helps to keep the tractive powerlow.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmissionmay shift to position P when the driver's orfront-passenger door are opened, whichcould lead to damage to the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with differential locks: makesure the differential locks are in automaticmode. When towing, the differential locksmust not be switched on. The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi-cle weight rating can be found on the vehi-cle identification plate (Y page 446).

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-age, have it transported on a transporter ortrailer.The automatic transmission must be in posi-tion N when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 279).You could otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

Example: towing eye mounting covers: Front cover; Back coverThe brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the frontand at the rear, behind the covers.

394 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 382).

X To open the cover at the front: press themark on cover: inwards in the directionof the arrow.

X To open the cover at the rear: insert aflat, blunt object into the cutout and levercover; out of the bumper.

X Take cover: or; off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-wise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: or; to the bumper andpress until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

Only possible for vehicles without4MATIC.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 124).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take the Smart-Key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 393).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 393).The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic trans-mission stays in position N when towing thevehicle, you must observe the followingpoints:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthe SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi-tion 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 158).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 124).i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use the com-bination switch as usual. In this case, onlythe indicator lamps for the direction oftravel flash. After resetting the combina-tion switch, the hazard warning lamp startsflashing again.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

Towing and tow-starting 395

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

axle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Information on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-ported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 391).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 391).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! For the fuse boxes in the engine compart-ment and under the rear bench seat, onlyuse fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise,components or systems could be dam-aged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseObserve the important safety notes(Y page 396)X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 182).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it (Y page 157). On

396 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure theignition is switched off (Y page 158).All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the front-passenger side of thedashboardRFuse box in the engine compartment on theright-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box under the rear bench seatThe fuse allocation chart is located in the fusebox under the rear bench seat (Y page 398).

Dashboard fuse boxObserve the important safety notes(Y page 396)

! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in thedirection of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartmentPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 396).

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold up cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the side of the fuse boxinto the retainers.

Fuses 397

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Fold down cover: and close clamps;.X Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seatPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 396).

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses or the covercould be damaged by the rear bench seat.

X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward(Y page 337).

X To open: lift and fold out carpet: in thedirection of the arrow.

X Release clamps; by pressing them in thedirection of the arrow.

X Fold cover= up in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located undercover=.

X To close: insert cover= into the retainerson the side of the fuse box.

X Fold down cover= until clamps; engageaudibly.

X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back(Y page 337).

398 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 400Important safety notes .................... 400Operation ........................................... 400Winter operation ............................... 402Tire pressure ..................................... 404Loading the vehicle .......................... 412All about wheels and tires ............... 415Changing a wheel ............................. 423Wheel and tire combinations ........... 428Emergency spare wheel ................... 440

399

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 428).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 412)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 179)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

400 OperationWheelsandtires

When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 401). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 404).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 440).

The service life of tires depends on the fol-lowing factors amongst other things:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Operation 401

Wheelsandtires

Z

approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 383).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 440).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 383).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with a

TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 423).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.

402 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter. These tires have been devel-oped specifically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 407).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 408).

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 408).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 440).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level(height 1) if snow chains have been instal-led. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping Sys-tem (ADS): do not use the sports mode if

you have installed snow chains. The vehiclemay otherwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 428).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains installed(Y page 73). You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 440).

Winter operation 403

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with the emergency sparewheel(Y page 440).Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tires is the maximum tire

pressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 412).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for various

404 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

operating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 417).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in the

tire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoring sys-tem, the tire pressure can be checked usingthe on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure 405

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-gency/collapsible spare wheel (dependingon vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehicle

406 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

when adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 404).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 404).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 412)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 179)Rin the "Tire pressure" sectionRunder "Tire pressure" (Y page 404)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 404).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart message whichappears in the ServiceService menu of the multi-function display. Information on the messagedisplay can be found in the "Restarting the tirepressure loss warning system" section(Y page 408).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 404).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Tire pressure 407

Wheelsandtires

Z

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressures can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's sideor the tire pressure table on the fuel fillerflap.The tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tirepressure is set, these incorrect values willbe monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 404).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correct sensorsare installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display.

408 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 410).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 404). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 411). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 404).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the

Tire pressure 409

Wheelsandtires

Z

tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Further information can be found on(Y page 312).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the mal-function has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for the posi-tion where the spare wheel is mounted isnot the same as the current tire pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is

410 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

too low and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 404).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 404).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Tire pressure 411

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximum

412 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

permissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1,400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 413

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard (Y page 412).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 257).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

414 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum gross vehi-cleweight rating fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 412).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-ble) must not exceed the permissible grossvehicle weight.Gross axleweight rating: themaximumper-missible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually approx-imately 8% of the gross weight of the trailerand its cargo.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Where applicable, the tire grading informa-tion can be found on the tire sidewall betweenthe tread shoulder and maximum tire width.

All about wheels and tires 415

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government test track asa tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 401).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 402).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tiresmustmeet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

416 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 421)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 420)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 419)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 406)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 420)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed index (Y page 417)D Load index (Y page 419)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

All about wheels and tires 417

Wheelsandtires

Z

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 412).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 419).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 419).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

418 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with increased top speed:174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 428).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify the speed indexB on the side-wall of the tire (Y page 417).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-

2 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 419

Wheelsandtires

Z

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 412).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of theU.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 428).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

420 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department of Transporta-tion.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants which the vehicle isdesigned for, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for the vehi-cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-led on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)TheGTW is theweight of a trailer including theweight of the load, luggage, accessories etc.on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall of

All about wheels and tires 421

Wheelsandtires

Z

the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum per-missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-perform-ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or ahigh-performance battery, are not included inthe curb weight and the weight of the acces-sories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

422 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num-ber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Breakdown assis-tance" section (Y page 383). Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 383).The "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 383) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 383).Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel:in the event of a flat tire, mount the emer-gency spare wheel according to the descrip-tion under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 424).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension components

may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 424).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem or the tire pressure monitor.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Changing a wheel 423

Wheelsandtires

Z

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Vehicle with emergency spare wheel:when mounting the emergency sparewheel in the event of a flat tire, follow theadditional notes on vehicle preparationunder "Flat tire" (Y page 383).

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Unload heavy luggage.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:make sure that highway level is selected(Y page 211).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 158).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.Necessary wheel-changing tools caninclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 382).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

424 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

must be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emer-gency spare wheel: use the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel only on the rearaxle. If you mount the "Minispare" emer-gency spare wheel on the front axle, thiscould result in damage to the brake system.If a tire on the front axle is defective, anintact wheel from the rear axlemust first bereplaced with the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel. The faulty wheel on the frontaxle may only then be replaced by theundamaged wheel from the rear axle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.

Changing a wheel 425

Wheelsandtires

Z

RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RDo not place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).

X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut ofthe jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

; Jacking point= Jack? CrankX Position jack= at jacking point;.The alignment bolt on the jack must beinserted into the intended opening on thejacking point.

ExampleX Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

426 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 423).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! Always use wheel bolts; to mount the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel could damage thebrake system.

: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by thefactory

; Wheel bolts for the collapsible sparewheel

Changing a wheel 427

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The tightening torque must be110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.

X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the stowage well underthe cargo compartment floor again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 404).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.

428 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-vious damage cannot always be detectedon retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety ifretreaded tires are mounted. Do not mountused tires if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 404).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)

Vehicles with MOExtended tires are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It istherefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat prop-erties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may beobtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find infor-mation on approved wheel rims and tiresizes for equipping your vehicle with wintertires. Winter tires are not available at thefactory as standard equipment or optionalextras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, in cer-tain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The size of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 429

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

ML 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 V BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 V BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 103 W3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 103 W3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 104 Y3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/40 R 21 105 Y XL4, 5, 6 BA: 9.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 2.09 in (53 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".5 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section.6 Only for vehicles with air suspension.

430 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 7 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/65 R 17 104 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.09 in (53 mm)

R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.7 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 431

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

ML 350

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

432 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 433

Wheelsandtires

Z

ML 350 4MATIC

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

434 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 435

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

ML 400

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

436 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

ML 400 4MATIC

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 437

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

438 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

ML 550 4MATIC

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S3, 8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)

Winter tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si3, 8 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 R 20 108 V XL M+Si4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires.8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".4 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 439

Wheelsandtires

Z

ML 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 265/45 ZR 20 108 Y XL8 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 ZR 21 107 Y XL8 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

Winter tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/45 R 20 105 V XL M+Si BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 295/35 R 21 107 V XL M+Si8 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

8 Snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

440 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emer-gency spare wheel: use the "Minispare"emergency spare wheel only on the rearaxle. If you mount the "Minispare" emer-gency spare wheel on the front axle, thiscould result in damage to the brake system.If a tire on the front axle is defective, anintact wheel from the rear axlemust first bereplaced with the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel. The defective wheel on thefront axle can then be replaced with theintact wheel from the rear axle.Make sure to note the placard on the"Minispare" emergency spare wheel.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesMounting the emergency spare wheel isdescribed under "Mounting a wheel"(Y page 424).You should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-essary (Y page 404). The value on the wheelor as given in the "Wheels and tires" section isvalid (Y page 443).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on the emer-gency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warning sys-

tem/the tire pressure monitor when thedamaged wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:after mounting an emergency spare wheel,the system may still display the tire pres-sure of the removed wheel for a fewminutes. The value displayed for the moun-ted emergency spare wheel is not the sameas the current tire pressure of the emer-gency spare wheel.

Removing theemergency sparewheel

Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle withoutlockable cargo compartment floor)

The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel canbe found in the stowage well under the cargocompartment floor.X Lift the cargo compartment floor up(Y page 344).

X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: removethe ball coupling stowage tray(Y page 258).

X Vehicles without a lockable cargo com-partment floor: turn emergency sparewheel retainer; counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel:.

Emergency spare wheel 441

Wheelsandtires

Z

Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartment floorX Vehicleswith a lockable cargo compart-ment floor: remove the contents of stow-age tray;.

X Turn the central retaining screw of stowagetray; and "Minispare" emergency sparewheel: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Remove stowage well;.X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel:.

On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound sys-tem, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheelis packed in the emergency spare wheel bag.The emergency spare wheel bag is secured tothe cargo tie down rings in the cargo com-partment.X To remove the emergency spare wheel:open the tailgate.

X Detach fastening straps;.X Unhook retaining spring hooks: and=of fastening straps; from the lasing eye-lets.

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bagwith the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel.

X Open the emergency spare wheel bag andremove the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel.

X To stow the emergency spare wheel:place the "Minispare" emergency sparewheel into the emergency spare wheel bagand close the emergency spare wheel bag.

X Place the emergency spare wheel bag withthe "Minispare" emergency spare wheelinto the cargo compartment with the car-rying strap at the back.

X Hook retaining spring hooks: and= offastening straps; into the lasing eyelets.

X Tighten fastening straps;.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 424).

442 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Technical data

All models (except the ML 550 4MATIC and ML 63 AMG 4MATIC)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/90 R18 113 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

4.0 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)

T 155/80 R19 114 M9

Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)4.5 B x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)

ML 550 4MATIC

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/80 R19 114 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

4.5 B x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)

ML 63 AMG 4MATIC

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/80 R19 114 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

4.5 B x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)

9 Only for vehicles with air suspension.

Emergency spare wheel 443

Wheelsandtires

Z

444

Useful information ............................ 446Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 446Identification plates ......................... 446Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 447Vehicle data ...................................... 456Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 457Trailer tow hitch ................................ 459

445

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); Vehicle model= VIN

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); Vehicle model= VIN

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

446 Identification platesTechnicaldata

VIN

X Open the front right-hand door.X Open cover: in the direction of the arrowand remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 447)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 446)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.DEFRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only use prod-ucts that have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Service products and filling capacities 447

Technicaldata

Z

Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

All models 24.6 US gal(93.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

All other models Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)

448 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additives recommen-ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives".You can obtain further information fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas-oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

All other models: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 87 RON/91 MON. Thismay reduce engine performance and increasefuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttleand sudden acceleration. Never refuel usingfuel with a lower AKI.

Information on refueling (Y page 178).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Refuel only using diesel fuel that con-forms to European standard EN 590 or anequivalent specification. Fuel that does notconform to EN 590 can lead to increasedwear and damage the engine and exhaustsystem.

Service products and filling capacities 449

Technicaldata

Z

! Do not use the following:Rmarine dieselRheating oilRbio-dieselRvegetable oilRgasolineRparaffinRkeroseneDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel anddo not use any special additives. This canotherwise lead to engine damage.

! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: incountries outside the EU, only use low sul-fur Euro diesel with a sulfur content ofunder 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emissioncontrol system could be damaged.

! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-ter: in countries where only diesel fuel witha high sulfur content is available, you willneed to carry out your vehicle's oil changeat shorter intervals. Further information onoil change intervals can be obtained at aqualified specialist workshop.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.Information on refueling (Y page 178).

Bio-diesel – FAME (fatty acidmethyl ester)Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. Theconcentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD maynot exceed 5% by volume.Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higherpercentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, candamage the engine and the fuel system. Forthis reason, they are not approved.For more information, consult the gas stationstaff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasolinepumpmust clearly state that the standard forULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is notclear, do not refuel the vehicle.

Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unlessthey have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on refueling (Y page 178).

Low outside temperaturesi Diesel fuel with improved cold flow prop-erties is available during thewintermonths.Further information about fuel propertiescan be obtained from oil companies, e.g. atgas stations.

Flexible Fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

450 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueledwith thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-gradeunleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less thanthat of the same amount of premium-gradegasoline. The amount of fuel consumed whenoperating the vehicle with E85 fuel is there-fore higher than with premium-grade gaso-line.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter that you are operating or have operatedthe vehicle with E85 fuel.

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡(0†), the starting procedure can take notice-ably longer when operating with E85 fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outsidetemperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).

DEF

Important safety notesComply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling DEF(Y page 447).DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.

Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You may expe-rience a burning sensation in your eyes, noseand throat. Coughing and watering of theeyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature of approx-imately 12‡ (-11†). The vehicle is deliveredfrom the factory equipped with a DEF pre-heating system. Winter operation can thus beguaranteed even at temperatures below 12‡(-11 †).

Additives

! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO22241. Do not use additives with DEF anddo not dilute DEF with water. This maydestroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.

Purity

! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other ser-vice products, cleaning agents or dust) leadto:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularlyimportant with respect to avoiding malfunc-tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment system.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, it must not be returned tothe tank. The purity of the fluid can no longerbe guaranteed.

Service products and filling capacities 451

Technicaldata

Z

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity

ML 250 BlueTEC4MATICML 350 Blue-TEC 4MATIC

7.3 US gal(27.5 l)

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 447).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

ML 350 276 229.5

ML 350 4MATIC 276 229.5

ML 400 276 229.5

ML 400 4MATIC 276 229.5

ML 550 4MATIC 278 229.5

ML 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

651 228.51,229.31,229.51,229.52

ML 350 Blue-TEC 4MATIC

642 228.51,229.31,229.51,229.52

AMG vehicles 157 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

ML 350ML 350 4MATICML 400ML 400 4MATIC

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

ML 550 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

ML 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

452 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Model Capacity

ML 350 Blue-TEC 4MATIC

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

AMG vehicles Without external oilcooler: 9.0 US qt

(8.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake

fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 447).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Service products and filling capacities 453

Technicaldata

Z

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 447).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

ML 350ML 350 4MATIC

Approx. 11.1 US qt(10.5 l)

ML 400ML 400 4MATIC

Approx. 10.9 US qt(10.3 l)

ML 550 4MATIC Approx. 12.0 US qt(11.4 l)

ML 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

Approx. 10.7 US qt(10.1 l)

ML 350 Blue-TEC 4MATIC

Approx. 12.2 US qt(11.5 l)

AMG vehicles Approx. 13.1 US qt(12.4 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor.

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 447).

454 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-ature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.

Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

AMG vehicles Capacity

Refrigerant

PAG oil

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant 37.0 ± 0.4 oz(1050 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.9 ± 0.4 oz(140 ± 10 g)

Service products and filling capacities 455

Technicaldata

Z

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Observe the information relating to level con-trol:RAIRMATIC package (Y page 213)RON&OFFROAD package (Y page 206)

Dimensions and weights

::

Openingheight

;;

Max.headroom

AMG vehicles 84.6 in -87.0 in

(2148mm -2211 mm)

79.0 in(2006 mm)

All other mod-els with:

::

Openingheight

;;

Max.headroom

Steel suspen-sion

86.4 in(2195 mm)

78.2 in(1987 mm)

AIRMATICpackage

84.3 in -87.2 in

(2140mm -2215 mm)

76.0 in -79.0 in

(1931mm -2006 mm)

ON&OFF-ROAD pack-age

84.3 in -88.4 in

(2140mm -2245 mm)

76.0 in -80.2 in

(1931mm -2036 mm)

AMG vehicles

Vehicle length 189.6 in(4817 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

84.3 in(2141 mm)

Maximum vehicle height 71.4 in(1815 mm)

Minimum vehicle height 69.0 in(1752 mm)

Wheelbase 114.8 in(2915 mm)

Maximum ground clear-ance

9.2 in(233 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance

6.8 in(172 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.80 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb(100 kg)

456 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

All other models

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

84.3 in(2141 mm)

Maximum vehicle height(steel suspension)

70.7 in(1796 mm)

Maximum vehicle height(AIRMATIC package)

71.6 in(1818 mm)

Maximum vehicle height(ON&OFFROAD package)

72.8 in(1848 mm)

Minimum vehicle height(highway driving level)

69.2 in(1758 mm)

Wheelbase 114.8 in(2915 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance (steel suspension)

8.0 in(202 mm)

Maximum ground clear-ance (AIRMATIC package)

10.0 in(255 mm)

Maximum ground clear-ance (ON&OFFROADpackage)

11.2 in(285 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance(AIRMATIC package)(ON&OFFROAD package)

7.1 in(180 mm)

Turning radius 38.7 ft(11.80 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb(100 kg)

Model Vehiclelength

ML 550 4MATIC 190.5 in(4839 mm)

All other models 189.1 in(4804 mm)

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Fording depth

: Fording depth

Fordingdepth

Steel-sprung vehicles 20 in(50 cm)

Vehicles with the AIR-MATIC package

Raised level 20 in(50 cm)

Vehicles with the ON&OFF-ROAD package

Off-road level 1 20 in(50 cm)

Off-road level 2 20 in(50 cm)

Off-road level 3 23.6 in(60 cm)

AMG vehicles

Raised level 20 in(50 cm)

For more information about off-road fording,see (Y page 190).

Vehicle data for off-road driving 457

Technicaldata

Z

Approach/departure angle

All vehicles (except vehicles with AMGbodystyling)

:: ;;

Steel-sprung vehi-cles

26° 25°

Vehicles with theAIRMATIC package

Highway level 23° 23°

Raised level 30° 28°

Vehicles with theON&OFFROADpackage

Highway level 23° 23°

Off-road level 1 26° 25°

Off-road level 2 30° 28°

Off-road level 3 31° 29°

AMG vehicles

Highway level (insports mode withthe AMG adaptivesuspension systemactivated)

19° 21°

Raised level 23° 24°

Vehicles with AMG bodystyling

:: ;;

Steel-sprungvehicles

25° 25°

Vehicles with theAIRMATIC pack-age

Highway level 22° 22°

Raised level 28° 27°

Vehicles with theON&OFFROADpackage

Highway level 22° 22°

Off-road level 1 25° 24°

Off-road level 2 28° 27°

Off-road level 3 29° 29°

For further information about approach/departure angles, see (Y page 194).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbingcapability depends on the off-road conditionsand the road surface conditions.Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package:the maximum gradient climbing ability is100% when the LOW RANGE off-road gear isselected.Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD pack-age: the maximum gradient climbing ability is80%.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.

i If the load on the front axle is reducedwhen pulling away on a steep uphill slope,the front wheels have a tendency to spin.4ETS recognizes this and brakes the

458 Vehicle data for off-road drivingTechnicaldata

wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torqueis increased, making it easier to drive off.

For further information about the maximumgradient climbing ability, see (Y page 195).

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the cooling system and drivetrain may be necessary, depending on thevehicle type.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chas-sis frame.

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (exam-ple): Anchorage points; Rear axle center line

Trailer tow hitch 459

Technicaldata

Z

Trailer loads

Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loadsMissing values were not available at time of going to print.

ML 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at amin-imum gradient-climbing capability of12% from a standstill)

6613 lbs (3000 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (thedrawbar noseweight is not included inthe trailer load)

529 lbs (240 kg)

Permissible rear axle loadwhen towing atrailer

3637 lbs (1650 kg)

ML 350 and ML 400

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at amin-imum gradient-climbing capability of12% from a standstill)

6613 lbs (3000 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (thedrawbar noseweight is not included inthe trailer load)

529 lbs (240 kg)

Permissible rear axle loadwhen towing atrailer

3527 lbs (1600 kg)

ML 350 4MATIC, ML 400 4MATIC andML 550 4MATIC

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at amin-imum gradient-climbing capability of12% from a standstill)

7198 lbs (3265 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (thedrawbar noseweight is not included inthe trailer load)

575 lbs (261 kg)

Permissible rear axle loadwhen towing atrailer

3527 lbs (1600 kg)

460 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata

ML 63 AMG 4MATIC

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at amin-imum gradient-climbing capability of12% from a standstill)

6724 lbs (3050 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (thedrawbar noseweight is not included inthe trailer load)

309 lbs (140 kg)

Permissible rear axle loadwhen towing atrailer

3858 lbs (1750 kg)

ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

Permissible trailer load, braked (at amin-imum gradient-climbing capability of12% from a standstill)

7198 lbs (3265 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight (thedrawbar noseweight is not included inthe trailer load)

575 lbs (261 kg)

Permissible rear axle loadwhen towing atrailer

3637 lbs (1650 kg)

The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be foundon the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which thetrailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Ball position

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, the dimen-sions stated in the illustration must not beexceeded.

Trailer tow hitch 461

Technicaldata

Z

462

463

464